Home

ZyXEL NBG334W User's Manual

1. 172 ODN EM C CUI 173 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UP irian eaaa asia 175 18 1 Introducing Universal Plug and PIay 12 1 eiecit tuni iita tmu toc emus iic tma epe 175 T9 GT How del know if musiga DP BIST 4 ccn ERRORES HC EST RED ESSO SH 175 19 4 E DUST Wael Sal creases atin nase ERR GR repe ewe een ee 175 jwEEe TuaD Suede 175 102 UPIP Sp E EL eerte ee nee eos RTC ON pop a Ioa iU d OS 176 ju gt e T I EI T T IL rere Tree 176 18 4 Installing UPAF in Windows Example 5 rrt rrr ienn as iria tiia 177 Part V Maintenance and Troubleshooting 187 Chapter 19 lr li e 189 p xb D OVON MNT 189 QS cUtI EC D rDEeS E Ur 189 TES WG SUING 5 2 190 NBG334W User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 20 Es a MN MT Tero TE 193 CER dt HIT 183 20 2 LoG SONOS e 194 aa Log Decor NS ever S 197 Chapter 21 ID I a 207 21 1 Firmware Upload SEFBOE ausos n RH REDE EHE e d se EH TEMERE E o MEE 207 Le TOTTI S CRS A 208 21 2 1 BACK BRC Onur AliOn a 209 21 2 2 Restore CONMQUIARON sccscisecccsintedusccasssadescanerdsssacaantedus une tado c vut dd diy od d Rid addu 209 21 2 3 BOCK t Factory Defaults aud iii
2. 215 LB NUBE o aspe peice anda tie cuui m A eU PA en Mon Aes testas fes il Cela ci au da 219 FOES OCU SE S D D T E S ate 221 Appendices and Indek A 227 NBG334W User s Guide 9 Contents Overview NBG334W User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Vs rs cnl toe m 3 rere dr pid n E 4 Saroy War Sao PT 6 CONSE COVE POW occu aAA a AA A 9 Table of COMENS M 11 Astor ROWO Sonn a 19 Hst of Tables sarraie EA 25 Part l Introduction E 29 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG3SQW a vicina iscisisninnnssssinassiensinassaninansntandanswiesnsneasnainensnaessneunanennnadninnns 31 QUERI E E A AN 31 Ie cd oo ER 31 Dee Router We m 32 14 R ter Features ve AP Fell eS cose opere Ea reor tui ERE EAR REN cR EN RA ERU EAA NKE 32 1 5 Ways to Manage tho NBOSOSW iuc ceseni serie dart bittet vc bottle ket tto cp I Ide ai 33 1 5 Good Habits cor Managing tie NBOGSOINV Lui dinem ded a e ave da baa 33 1 d n Qr E T 33 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator siririna knaen aai aia 35 RS Congar OVON p 35 2 2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 iiec enero rna oll ais pP QU nunnana DRIN anana NRI REN PAAR ERE Rd 35 25 Resetting The iter 37 2 9 1 Procedura to Use the Reset BUD 125 ostro pti Ero y ped ER
3. CATEGORY LINK TAB Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter Advanced QoS WAN Advanced LAN IP Alias Advanced DHCP Server Advanced NAT Advanced Security Firewall Services Content Filter Schedule Management Static Route IP Static Route Bandwidth MGMT Advanced Monitor Remote MGMT Telnet FTP DNS Maintenance Logs Log Settings In AP Mode many screens will not be available See Chapter 4 on page 63 for more information NBG334W User s Guide Sys Op Mode 23 1 Overview The Sys Op Mode System Operation Mode function lets you configure whether your NBG334W is a router or AP You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device See Section 1 1 on page 31 for more information on which mode to choose 23 1 1 Router A router connects your local network with another network such as the Internet The router has two IP addresses the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address Figure 126 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode LAN WAN 23 1 2 AP An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address To connect to the Internet another device such as a router is required NBG334W User s Guide 215 Chapter 23 Sys Op Mode Figure 127 IP Address in AP Mode LAN Internet 23 2 Selecting System Operation Mo
4. Table 35 WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable Select this to enable the WPS feature PIN Number This displays a PIN number last time system generated Click Generate to generate a new PIN number WPS Satus Status This displays the WPS status Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Refresh Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh 5 9 2 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station tab BS Note After you click Push Button on this screen you have to press a similiar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes To add the second wireless station you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 45 WPS Station Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network Push Button Or input station s PIN number Start q Note 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Use this button when you use the PBC Push Button Configuration method to configur
5. PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION DESCRIPTION L to W LAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN W to L WAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN L to L P LAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or NBG334W the NBG334W W to W P WAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN NBG334W or the NBG334W Table 92 ICMP Notes TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 0 Echo Reply 0 Echo reply message 3 Destination Unreachable 0 Net unreachable 1 Host unreachable 2 Protocol unreachable 3 Port unreachable 4 A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment DF 5 Source route failed 4 Source Quench 0 A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network 5 Redirect 0 Redirect datagrams for the Network 1 Redirect datagrams for the Host NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 92 ICMP Notes continued TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 2 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network 3 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message 11 Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error Timestamp Timestamp requ
6. seeesees 104 Figure 57 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation eeeeese 107 Figure 58 Network WAN gt Advanced asinosdennien cte deste boa ea dados oce cesi an dadas a aon 109 FWS STAN IP EOMP see TEE 113 Figure 60 Network LAN gt IP ee 114 Figure 61 Notwork gt LAN gt IPF ANBS sasira riannee tb Kk elk EE P tax nrbt orta E np 115 Figure 62 Network gt LAN Tcp cio 115 Figure 62 Guest Wireless LAN NolWOrK siae etr rg tao rn xr exa ALANE acs ARE ARS 4 117 Figure 64 Network gt Guest WLAN gt General ueeeeeussesseseieeenha nennen th nana ninth anna anita annua aaa 118 Figure 65 Network gt Guest WLAN gt MAC Filter 5 tiii ertet oir tnnt tetro tuni tiere tana pert tn appear eaae pad 119 Figure 56 Newark Guest WLAN gt IF iucicixseixnse tct kp ESO ORE EREERRRE E EEEVERVNCA FEVER EETUERRHOL ERR ER CL ES ER 120 Figure 67 Example Bandwidth for Different Networks eese eene enne tn nennen natn hun 120 Figure 68 Network gt Guest WLAN gt Bandwidth 1 sceceseeeeceemi enun r tnde noticia a dna nein d toda an 121 Figure 69 Network gt DHCP Server gt General eese narii tna naa rne ta a ana n ata RR au Eu 44 123 Figur 70 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced auasdenboxentemi ids ppt pRpI er cU amp Nec EH ia 125 Figure 71 Network DHCP Server gt Client LIE aussetsescir retten tantae ntt ttd nl
7. 178 Figure 100 INGIWOrK Connections M 178 Figure 101 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard sesseeeem e 179 Figure TO2 NEWN SEDE etse buda Metu TgaR ctp Lvixe ti bemipddatt etel a nan bula eaa a Pues oc a EU dip tcp etai iudfs 179 Figure 103 Network Connections Re 180 Figure 104 Internet Connection Properties icai annt tanto aka ERR aai rh a kn E KI IRR a ERR Rack a ER 6A 181 Figure 105 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings ccccccsssecceeeesseceeeeeessneeeerentneces 182 Figure 106 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add seeeseues 182 Figure TOL System Tray ICON ains aecenas Rb ohh aa Lieu cna bd EK ebbe adeb pec buc ia utei dad aU Eid 183 Figure 106 Intemet Connection SIalUS e 183 Figure TUS NOBNOIK LOODHIBEDTIS 53 55 12 12H IRI HD Ri ES ER Rb Ga HRK NDA ERO HR OR EU SH dt 184 Figure 110 Network Connections My Network Places eese ne nente nnne nhne nnn innt anu n o PnnaS 185 Figure 111 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ssusesssss 185 Figure 112 Maintenance gt System gt General eeeeeeseesieeseeese eee th nnn na kai tnnt aaa nua nh aaa aa ka Est aAa 189 Figure 113 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting iuseedes cat bna qaa EPA RRAEEPPLRH AREE Pure Y reet eene rere HARE EIS 190 Figure 114
8. 73 2 1 Wireless Net wea AICI VIS Loss pesetbDed anin EANN 73 ga Niroless Socunty OVOIOW 75 12 NBG334W User s Guide Table of Contents cp gels 75 TL AMAC Address FIET eT teheuieedeaisstisessevamadoan asmededdassetawaderanead 75 D2 User AuthenticaliG em 76 Ff All gi 821 a ee eer EPCS Pe ero PE CATE Pree re cer pee reer erE Mere repre tree pent aey rere rer er re reer re 76 TAR AN Meer enecerrr tr eon Petre re tere rn ey cre rr er miner ee v ebd cce bee nee einer crm ri ete he tere rretarr eter r TT 5 3 1 Reguirements Tor ROAMING M 78 er RUBS 0 SON MANN RETO S TO 78 I CAG ee RN TT 79 5 Genaral Wireless LAN SERIE uiii mae b too tio t rede ot v Date boa b i d 79 sms Nemo E S S T 81 Ec ilie e 81 DaS Idi K M 83 RA cl N M 84 uvidj nip ge 86 5 7 Wireless LAN Advanced SOIGe es tuse enne ke pi i pi Lea d ERR REA EXE hania RE aa x SaL ER paa dg 86 5 0 Qualy Ot Servicos 0S SUCE emp C 88 5 8 1 Application Priority C OBIBIUERUGDE 555322224 H7 LASS FLASIS UO E OSS PRI DAIS S A PRLA SERRE 13S RODA 89 IPT FS UI NET ORE 90 C OR WPS SMOG e 90 zB Map Sie Station mel e VERE 91 Chapter 6 WSLS EU i147 esr 93 6 1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP iuuenes tepore n
9. eeeseeeeeen enne nenne 156 Figure 86 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup sues 157 Figure 87 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example sss 160 Figure 88 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General ssssssse eene 165 Figure 89 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced cccccceseccceceeetnececeeeesseeecerenseceeeeeennneees 166 Figure 90 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced User defined Service Rule Configuration 167 Figure 91 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Monitor ssseeenmm emen 168 Figure 92 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW sissscsccensincesevesennccourtseneaseuvitennscsestennd aseutennnesuari vans 170 Figure 93 Telnet Configuration on a TOP IP MetwOFk i rmn rar rat terret ern sions 171 Figure 94 Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet cccceccssenceceetsnnncaensnsnnceennenneneeensnanececenaanece 171 Figure 95 Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP Liu aesaaseiecibaan ene chbbk rte Ethan Eon dau Ebb biet EEbbb adden Ead 172 Figure 96 Management gt Remote MGMT gt DNS ssssseeusseeseeen enema na nnt n tht a ka nhan a a ka unns a aa kun naa 173 Figure 97 urecuu DM Wdt ME 176 Figure 98 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication cccceceeeeseeeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaees 177 Figure 99 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components
10. Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions Table 103 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP Microsoft s implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol MBM v2 Media Bandwidth Management v2 Wall mounting Instructions BS Do the following to hang your NBG334W on a wall See the Figure 133 on page 233 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them 1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall 2 Drill two holes for the screws Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the prod
11. NBG334W User s Guide 277 Appendix F Services 278 Table 118 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBIOS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is TCP UDP 138 used for communication between TCP UDP 139 computers in a LAN TCP UDP 445 NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing fo
12. Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION Select a language from the drop down list box to have the web configurator display in that language Click this icon to open the setup wizard Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information Click this icon at any time to exit the web configurator NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key continued ICON DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval 20 seconds Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics Refresh Now Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Etherne
13. EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MDS authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MDS authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA
14. If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG334W IP address 192 168 1 1 See your Quick Start Guide for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 123 Configuration Restore Error System Restore Restore configuration error The configuration file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file Click Help for more information Return 21 2 3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the NBG334W to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG334W Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for more information on the RESET button 21 3 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the NBG334W reboot This does not affect the NBG334W s configuration Figure 124 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software resta
15. MAC Address Type the MAC address with colons of a computer on your LAN IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server The NBG334W passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address in the order you specify here to the DHCP clients The NBG334W only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured NBG334W User s Guide 125 Chapter 10 DHCP Table 49 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced Third DNS Server LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and Second DNS the NBG334W s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only Server DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select DNS Relay to have the NBG334W act as a DNS proxy The
16. NBG334W User s Guide 267 Appendix E Wireless LANs BS Figure 171 RTS CTS pron CTS Range it ath O nn om pent RR ARI ER RR je ma aene P mra Station AP E oss iia j A Data E Mcr Pi Ce r m BC Ke EH NR Stations A and B do nota pee Station A fe hear each other They Station B m t m can hear the AP When station sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You shou
17. The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode Figure 31 Menu AP Mode d we Status Wireless LAN LAN System Logs Tools Config Mode Sys OP Mode Language The following table describes the sub menus Table 23 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG334W s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode Table 23 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG334W Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings QoS Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain n
18. Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turnon your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 157 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac System Preferences a UO 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 158 Macintosh OS X Network 60 Network m RO a Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet B Proxies Configure Using DHCP 3 Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional
19. Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting oar WO ND Click OK to close the window Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default NBG334W User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 139 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting amp Active scripting a Be Ble 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable 9 Enable Prompt amp Scripting of Java applets Q Disable AQ Enable 2 Q Prompl Lienas AuhSenkie skinn b custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected Click OK to close the window cO WN Figure 140 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable es Font download Q Disable 9 Enable a 3 Microsoft VM Java permissions Q Custom Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium z Reset J NBG334W User s Guide From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options
20. Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The NBG334W may be referred to as the NBG334W the device the product or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in ot
21. The following screen displays Figure 90 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced User defined Service Rule Configuration Rule Configuration BW Budget Destination Address Destination Subnet Netmask Destination Port Source Address Source Subnet Netmask Source Port Protocol Minimum Bandwidth if kbps boa b Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced User defined Service Rule NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION BW Budget Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second Subnet Netmask Destination Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Destination Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Destination Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination See Table 64 on page 163 for some common services and port numbers Source Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation Source Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Source Netmask Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting S
22. Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK NBG334W User s Guide Appendix H Customer Support NBG334W User s Guide Index Numerics 802 11 Mode 87 A ActiveX 150 address resolution protocol ARP 113 Alert 194 alternative subnet mask notation 243 any IP note 113 AP 215 AP Access Point 267 AP Mode 215 menu 66 overview 63 status screen 64 AP network 215 Asymmetrical routes 144 and IP alias 144 see also triangle routes 144 B Backup configuration 209 Bandwidth management 60 application based 159 classes and priorities 164 monitor 168 overview 159 priority 160 services 161 subnet based 159 Bandwidth management monitor 43 Basic wireless security 51 BitTorrent 161 BSS 265 Index C CA 271 Certificate Authority 271 certifications 281 notices 282 viewing 282 Channel 39 65 267 Interference 267 channel 73 command interface 33 Configuration 208 backup 209 reset the factory defaults 210 restore 209 contact information 285 Content Filtering Days and Times 149 Restrict Web Features 149 Cookies 150 copyright 281 CPU usage 40 65 CTS Clear to Send 268 customer support 285 D Daylight saving 191 DDNS 139 see also Dynamic DNS DHCP 43 123 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client information 126 DHCP client list 126 DHCP server 111 123 DHCP table 43 126 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 229 disclaimer 281
23. DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client or None WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG334W is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using 802 11 Mode This shows the IEEE 802 11 standard that the NBG334W supports Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG334W WPS This shows the WPS WiFi Protected Setup Status Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status System Uptime This is the total time the NBG334W has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG334W s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG334W s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the NBG334W is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334W is us
24. DNS 57 125 DNS server see also Domain name system NBG334W User s Guide Index DNS Domain Name System 173 DNS server 125 Domain name 49 vs host name see also system name Domain Name System 125 duplex setting 40 66 Dynamic DNS 139 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 123 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 272 DynDNS Wildcard 139 E EAP Authentication 271 e mail 90 Encryption 273 encryption 76 and local user database 77 key 77 WPA compatible 77 ESS 266 ESSID 225 Extended Service Set 266 Extended wireless security 52 F Factory LAN defaults 111 FCC interference statement 281 feature specifications 231 File Transfer Program 161 Firewall 143 Firewall overview guidelines 144 ICMP packets 146 network security Stateful inspection 143 ZyXEL device firewall 143 Firmware upload 207 file extension using HTTP firmware version 39 65 Fragmentation Threshold 87 268 FTP 33 172 FTP see also File Transfer Program 161 G gateway 156 General wireless LAN screen 79 118 H Hidden Node 267 HTTP 161 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 161 IANA 248 IBSS 265 IEEE 802 119 269 IGMP 101 112 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 101 112 Independent Basic Service Set 265 Install UPnP 177 Windows Me 177 Windows XP 178 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet connection Ethernet PPPoE see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection Internet connection wizard 5
25. LAN and wireless LAN WLAN in the same subnet See the figure below for an example Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode WLAN m Internet J in J B LAN 4 2 Setting your NBG334W to AP Mode 1 Log into the web configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this 2 To set your NBG334W to AP Mode go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select Access Point NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode Figure 29 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General General C Router Access Point Note System Operation Mode Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network 3 A pop up appears providing information on this mode Click OK in the pop up message window See Section 23 2 on page 216 for more information on the pop up Click Apply Your NBG334W is now in AP Mode BS modes You do not have to log in again or restart your device when you change 4 3 The Status Screen in AP Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode Figure 30 Status AP Mode ZyXEL QP status gt Status Device Information System Name Firmware
26. NBG334W Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN Allow between LAN and WAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide BS Guest WLAN Guest WLAN allows you to set up a wireless network where users can access to Internet via the NBG334W Z but not other networks connected to the Z In the following figure a guest user can access the Internet from the guest wireless network A via Z but not the home or company network N You can also configure access to be Guest WLAN by using MAC filtering see Section 9 2 on page 118 and bandwidth management see Section 9 4 on
27. RH Non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 20 C 60 C Humidity 20 90 RH Non condensing mounting Distance between the 125 mm centers of the holes on the device s back Screw size for wall M3 10 Table 101 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits NBG334W User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions Table 101 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default Password 1234 DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Wireless Interface Wireless LAN Guest WLAN Default Wireless SSID Wireless LAN ZyXEL Wireless LAN when WPS enabled ZyXEL WPS Guest WLAN Guest Default Wireless IP Address Wireless LAN Same as LAN 192 168 1 1 Guest WLAN 192 168 2 1 Default Wireless Subnet Mask Wireless LAN Same as LAN 255 255 255 0 Guest WLAN 255 255 255 0 Default Wireless DHCP Pool Size Wireless LAN Same as LAN 32 from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Guest WLAN 16 from 192 168 2 33 to 192 168 2 48 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NBG334W Wireless Functionality Allows IEEE 802 11b and or IEEE 802 11g wireless clients to connect to the NBG334W wirelessly Enable wireless security WEP WPA 2 WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to pr
28. Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Support Telephone 1 800 978 7222 Sales E mail sales zyxel com Sales Telephone 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www zyxel com NBG334W User s Guide 287 Appendix H Customer Support 288 Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway e e e e e Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland e e e E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore e e e e e e Spain Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone
29. Wireless Setup Name SSID Hide SSID Security Security Mode M Enable Wireless LAN Channel Selection Operating Channel ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz Channel 006 No Security Reset The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 27 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Wireless LAN Click the check box to activate wireless LAN Name SSID Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated Wireless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Channel Selection Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Select a channel from the drop down list box The options vary depending on whether you are using A or B G frequency band and the country you are in Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels Operating Channel This displays the channel the NBG334W is currently using Security Mode Select Static WEP WPA PSK WPA WPA2 PSK or WPA2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to
30. a MAC Address Em MAC Address oo 00 00 00 00 00 oo 00 00 00 00 00 2 o0 00 00 00 00 00 18 oo 00 00 00 00 00 3 p0 00 06 00 00 00 19 foo 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 45 Network gt Guest WLAN gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering for the Guest WLAN Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the NBG334W MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG334W Select Allow to permit access to the NBG334W MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG334W Set This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to Address the NBG334W in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 9 3 Guest WLAN IP Screen Click Network gt Guest WLAN gt IP The screen appears as shown NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 9 Guest WLAN Figure 66 Network gt Guest WLAN gt IP Guest WLAN TCP IP IP Address fis2 168 2 4 IP Subnet
31. 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Inte rnet Access Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The NBG334W supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly Nailed up Connection Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the NBG334W automatically disconnects from the PPTP server PPTP Configuration Get automatically from ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the
32. 127 Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 2 c eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseenenneenaeess 130 Figure 73 Nobwork gt NAT gt General o eectti thread potrete abest b Feb vec ddr vbt tbi go bue ddr e ped c kd da 130 Figure 74 Newark NAT ApPICaUOM 31 deditos pe oL I LR E LR Eo XR IR al pe ir FM EE sarei dd 132 Foe To Omme L EOM MM e 134 Figure 76 Trigger Port Forwarding Process EXainipleicccccscciccscacssssteiencscdecws sanssasniacesssanten dana saepe sega ERU 135 Figure 77 Network gt NAT gt Advanced 1ssscesuese ecce kan epos era Henn na p le c n EGLI n a d AR Ea ER 136 isi FLIEU D dE eem 140 Figure 79 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem eeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnnnn 145 Figure 80 Security gt Firewall gt General octet siete seared rnm nn rna ah er nth a Ran nra RR nannaa E nada 145 Figure 81 Secunty gt Firewall gt SOIVIGOS iiucececsesscsecciui teo rr tt p tort tu Erorr dana errana E Eure Eo bL MR C vc I EEUU Ed 146 NBG334W User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 Security gt Content Fiter Filer ies issicasessssiansatesassonsassssssansceeaasouas 13A Ka eS Hd S FR Rats 150 Figure 83 Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule iara aua ERR a ah a Euh eua ERI iin nk 151 Figure 84 Example of Static Routing Topology iisnsisea scettr rte that e Eb bba six EE bbb ad Deep bbba sdVe saiia 155 Figure 85 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route
33. 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 105 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 106 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for
34. 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain NBG334W User s Guide Appendix H Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road
35. ActiveX controls Java and cookies attacks such as DoS and IPSec Log entries in red indicate system error logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order Figure 114 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log Logs Display All Logs z Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log ETN Successful WEB login 14 28 47 2 04 06 2006 Time synchronization 14 18 15 successful 3 04 06 2006 Time initialized by NTP 14 18 15 server ntp3 cs wisc edu 4 04 06 2006 Time synchronization 14 17 13 successful 5 04 06 2006 Time initialized by NTP 14 17 13 server ntp3 cs wisc edu 6 04 06 2006 Time synchronization 06 11 52 successful 7 04 06 2006 Time initialized by NTP 06 11 52 server timel stupi se 8 01 01 2000 WAN interface gets 04 50 52 IP 172 23 23 114 01 01 2000 04 23 06 Successful WEB login 10 01 01 2000 Waiting content filter server 03 43 10 66 35 255 70 timeout 11 01 01 2000 Waiting content filter server 03 42 02 66 35 255 70 timeout 192 168 1 33 User admin 128 105 37 11 123 172 23 23 114 123 128 105 37 11 123 172 23 23 114 123 192 36 143 150 123 172 23 23 114 123 WANI 192 168 1 33 User admin 192 168 1 33 3241 202 43 201 234 80 tw f172 mail yahoo com 192 168 1 33 3188 203 84 196 97 80 tw yimg com NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs The following table describes the labels in this screen T
36. Bandwidth Management eee eene hernia anna nnt th nana hn 159 16 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management ecceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 160 16 5 Bandwidth Management Prioris 5 cratis Leto ota ea ee a a ex etu e ga Ea 160 16 6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services eeeesseeeeeeee nennen nnne 161 166 1 Services and Port NUMBERS M 162 16 7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities ssssssses 164 16 8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration ssssee 165 16 9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration sse 165 18 9 1 Rule Configuration duspudxeutbespetadet ee EPARE e epupnbdx lanier andar natin Shaan da baa dida 167 16 10 Bandwidth Management MOnitOr scescecn eser ett poo e tonii oec enun i a eorr I e poop AEEA pane 168 Chapter 17 Remote M anagemielib ueseaaensckiu idi nE nS pae rac EAR GEK K ABRE E KO dI AKKUS n KE ANN E RR 169 17 1 Remote Management Overview eeecuseeeeneni tense nnn nnn th anna ninth a Rua aoo EAR Ra Eu o IRA RR Ru nee 169 173 1 Remote Management Limitations uus Fees vd aaeE bab eq eR E YN n EE EU cuan Bre da ae Fe FH DN ARE META 169 17 1 2 Remote Management and N T iius ion det nta rrt d Rand rti Mt s tt 170 DF as SoD MMII e A UT 170 NEWS 170 jr 3r P 171 ur NI cci PTUS UD UE DU LI EU NT 171 TO FIP COGEN
37. Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN BS It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your NBG334W you can also select an option WPA Compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG334W Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key 5 3 Roaming A wireless station is a device with an IEEE 802 11a b g compliant wireless interface An access point AP acts as a bridge between the wireless and wired networks An AP creates its own wireless coverage area A wireless station can associa
38. Guide Chapter 13 Firewall The NBG334W is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The NBG334W has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service 13 1 4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via web configurator Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way including attaching a modem to the port C Limit who can access your router 4 Don t enable any local service such as SNMP or NTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network 5 For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and prote
39. IP Subnet Mask Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 5 Advanced LAN Screen To change your NBG334W s advanced IP settings click Network gt LAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 62 Network gt LAN gt Advanced Advanced Multicast Setup Multicast None Any IP Setup Active Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN Apply Reset NBG334W User s Guide 115 Chapter 8 LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network gt LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select IGMP V 1 or IGMP V 2 or None IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 Any IP Setup Active Select this if you want to let computers on different subnets use the
40. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your NBG334W but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG334W will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W unless you are instructed to do otherwise 3 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance
41. Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping on The NBG334W will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Select Guest WLAN to reply to incoming Guest WLAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN amp Guest WLAN to reply to all incoming LAN WAN and Guest WLAN Ping requests Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG334W by probing for unused ports If you select this option the NBG334W will not respond to port request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG334W unseen By default this option is not selected and the NBG334W will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports anda TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG334W s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the NBG334W reacts based on the firewall policy which by default is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet You can use the command sys firewall tcprst rst on off to change this policy When the firewall mechanis
42. Ji S XX AP 1 Fy AP2 Ae 2 X i i P i f jT 7 a D BSS2 E o opasteaen b d Wireless Station B PH Station C E Mean wee PI sean mem um i ar arn 1 e mmus m scar e v n ae gt ays pS re 2 UIN WEE oe A C NO co 2322555 iud WA 2 7 77 Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by IEEE 802 11a b g wireless devices Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other
43. LABEL DESCRIPTION Day to Block Select check boxes for the days that you want the NBG334W to perform content filtering Select the Everyday check box to have content filtering turned on all days of the week Time of Day to Block Time of Day to Block allows the administrator to define during which time 24 Hour Format periods content filtering is enabled Time of Day to Block restrictions only apply to the keywords see above Restrict web server data such as ActiveX Java Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected Select All Day to have content filtering always active on the days selected in Day to Block with time of day limitations not enforced Select From and enter the time period in 24 hour format during which content filtering will be enforced NBG334W User s Guide 151 Chapter 14 Content Filtering Table 58 Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a website s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter 14 6 1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default the NBG334W checks the URL s domain name or IP address when performing keyword b
44. LAN DHCP Setup 192 168 2 33 i Client List iw address NAC Address 1 192 168 1 35 twpci 00 00 e8 7c 14 80 Guest WLAN DHCP Setup a a pci2 00 02 63 56 16 9d Apply Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Host Name This field displays the computer host name MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select this check box in the LAN DHCP Setup or Guest WLAN DHCP Setup section to have the NBG334W always assign the IP address es to the MAC address es and host name s After you click Apply the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen where you can edit them Apply Click Apply to save your settings Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP NBG334W User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure
45. Legal Information 281 Customer Support 285 Index 291 227 Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions The following tables summarize the NBG334W s hardware and firmware features Table 100 Hardware Features Dimensions W x D x H 162 x 115 x 33 mm Weight 237g Power Specification Input 120 240 AC 50 60 Hz Output 12 VAC 1A Ethernet ports Auto negotiating 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables 4 5 Port Switch A combination of switch and router makes your NBG334W a cost effective and viable network solution You can add up to four computers to the NBG334W without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port You can add up to five computers to the NBG334W when you connect to the Internet in AP mode Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub LEDs PWR LAN1 4 WAN WLAN WPS Reset Button The reset button is built into the rear panel Use this button to restore the NBG334W to its factory default settings Press for 1 second to restart the device Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings Antenna The NBG334W is equipped with a 2dBi detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network Operation Environment Temperature 0 C 40 C Humidity 20 85
46. MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Otherwise click Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port 7 3 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The add
47. Maintenance gt Logs View LOO ss iccsstessssenesextasscsnsderasscansests RR YS RERO RA E E AA 193 Figure 115 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Sells sue eei e estne heh nua ita ag kn RE xaxa ad 195 Figure 116 Maintenance gt Tools gt FIIO ies isesc cii trn rt tette DIS ER ba aan baa a ex Eb iaai pb bbb a add aR 207 Figure TT ood WINI assises Gas nita dud de ia ax t a ue Fd n ed Rata Bas GR La E ea t 208 Figure 118 Network Temporarily Disconnected dass pp ed ekerberseasuek eb qd eu kubUb od Yee EeTH aep e PE bxlax ia 208 Figure 179 Upload Error Message p 208 Figure 120 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration 21 ccce rie tak iacta bd RE rca 209 Figure 121 Configuration Restore SUCDISSTU 22 p n kot retire kiir EDI Ntra HEIN DEP pM FUENTE IUO 210 Figure 122 Tomporanly Disconnected oec eterne dod ten a 210 Figure 123 Configuration Restore Error cussueieseete er rper Eo PR ERGO ei ena ac EN RA RR a d ad 210 Figure 124 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart uuuusescceeseiicser etnia te erint trop ta erected ae eerte eae re bI cd gae pre dar EE dV 211 NBG334W User s Guide 21 List of Figures Figure 125 Maintenance gt Config Mode gt General esee eene nnne nnn nnne nnne 213 Figure 126 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode sse 215 Figure 127 IP Address ium d a M 216 Figure 128 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General eese senec enne nnne nnn nnn nnn n
48. Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network gt Guest WLAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Type an IP address for the devices on the Guest WLAN using this as the gateway IP address IP Subnet Type the subnet mask for the guest wireless LAN Network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 9 4 Guest WLAN Bandwidth Screen The Bandwidth screen allows you to specify a priority level and restrict the maximum bandwidth for the guest wireless network Additionally you can also define bandwidth for your home or office network in the Network gt Wireless LAN gt Bandwidth An example is shown next to define maximum bandwidth for your networks A is Guest WLAN and N is home or company network Figure 67 Example Bandwidth for Different Networks 600 kbps UN IM Internet p e i NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 9 Guest WLAN Click Network gt Guest WLAN gt Bandwidth The following screen appears Figure 68 Network gt Guest WLAN gt Bandwidth Bandwidth Management Priority Maximum Bandwidth Enable Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN High fo kbps Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Network gt Guest WLAN gt Bandwidt
49. NAT gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol Address address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local Translation network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Select the check box to enable NAT Default Server Setup Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the NBG334W discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 4 NAT Application Screen Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded To change your NBG334W s port forwarding settings click Network gt NAT gt Application The screen appears as shown BES If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT gt General screen the NBG334W discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management Refer to Appendix F on page 277 for port numbers commonly use
50. NAT on the NBG334W 11 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet For example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network 11 2 Using NAT BS You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG334W 11 2 1 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server I
51. NBG334W s LAN IP address displays in the field to the right read only The NBG334W tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG334W itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG334W the NBG334W forwards the query to the NBG334W s system DNS server configured in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 4 Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of LAN or Guest WLAN network clients using the NBG334W s DHCP servers Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name Click Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List You can also view a read only client list by clicking the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen The following screen displays NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Figure 71 Network DHCP Server Client List
52. Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the guest WLAN network Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using for guest WLAN network NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System Status System Up Time This is the total time the NBG334W has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG334W s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG334W s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the NBG334W is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using bandwidth management Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334W is using Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall System Setting Firewall This shows whether the firewall is active or not Bandwidth Management This shows whether the bandwidth management is active or not UPnP This shows whether UPnP is active or not Configuration Mode This shows whether the advanced scre
53. SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 BitTorrent BitTorrent is a free P2P peer to peer sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889 BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself It distributes files by corporation and trading that is the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file MSN Webcam MSN messenger allows you to chat online and send instant messages If you use MSN messenger and also have a webcam you can send your image photo in real time along with messages WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system t
54. Tables Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs AP Mode 2 s ceseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaecaeeeeeeeeenteseeees 32 Tage Fro az Vey El Sapa eee ee ny ener etre pi ee vere oo on eer pe om ne aa ry enn pU dur ER pau apu ener 33 Table 3 Status Sereen MOGI KOy e 38 Tabled Web Configurator Status SGER csisssessscsusssusseusansorsiaauyaanesiaeseasedssagesentsgeayasanasdeartaaassisalnaeests 39 Tabs ee E dee E ner 41 Table b Summan DHCP Table ag trees dic ceacianiisiaencsapeseaiicidsieuajeoiieiacann ie ea EU IU PER E CE UE EU LU na 44 Table 7 Summary PACKET Statistics urnen innanti oia S paar ERR un pn ad dk i aaia Fev kd eu n EINER AREE Red Lena ds 45 Table 6 Summary Wireless Association LIBE 11i ttr dna Rte bu n EEKEEPE PHASE OE AE LET NAEEEHE OEE 46 Table 9 Wizard Step T System MONTAG sinisorsa ER P RATS EERE AS ETUR EX NVk Py PLA y S kp Pre tS ob DR 49 Tabe 10 Wizard Step 22 Wireless LAN RTT 50 Table 11 Wizard Step 2 Basic WEP Security siscccccsinasdecccosnrouteetsentesuresannninneeninanduetianiaienandeeeosnnde 51 Table 12 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security 52 Table 13 Wizard Step 3 ISF Paramotor 12s e aa E AEE EE E E 53 Table 14 Wizard Step 3 PPPOE CORMGGHOM ausnsocteosuecttenaiec ner eecia tack t Ape EEr Ee EEan 54 Tabe T5 Wizard Step 9 PETEDORBEOBON 22xihikessae tUi ce Pte bea pr Ert cba E AAA Ni aiana bus d ad ERREUR AAN 55 Table 15 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Ad
55. This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address which of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Refresh Click Refresh to renew the screen 2 5 5 Summary Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status packet specific statistics and the system up time The Poll Interval s field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen Figure 9 Summary Packet Statistics Packet Statistics ee Down 00 00 00 LAN 100M Full 12907 16373 774 583 1 01 02 WLAN 54M 4396 1022 0 5 52 58 Guest nn WLAN Down 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 System Up Time 5 53 04 Poll Interval s b jJ sec NBG334W User s Guide uniquely identifies a device The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Summary Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the NBG334W s port type Status For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp
56. WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS Server server IP address that the ISP assigns Third DNS Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address Address by using the NBG334W s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Clone the computer s MAC address Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or up
57. address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter 8 2 LAN TCP IP The NBG334W has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 8 2 1 Factory LAN Defaults The LAN parameters of the NBG334W are preset in the factory with the following values P address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured NBG334W User s Guide 111 Chapter 8 LAN 8 2 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to the IP address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter for this information 8 2 3 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed in
58. address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG334W s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the computer s MAC address Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this scr
59. computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application 11 5 1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding 134 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 76 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example IE Jane s awy computer Internet m Real Audio server Port 7070 ll 1 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG334W to record Jane s computer IP address The NBG334W associates Jane s computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The NBG334W forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The NBG334W times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol N a 11 5 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG334W and going to the outside 2 Ifan application needs a continuous data stream that port range will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can t trigger it 11 6 NAT Adv
60. configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the NBG334W to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the NBG334W You could simply restore your last configuration 1 7 LEDs Figure3 Front Panel ZyXEL F 0 CO CD GD GD GP CED gt aD aD The following table describes the LEDs Table 2 Front Panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The NBG334W is receiving power and functioning I properly O Off The NBG334W is not receiving power NBG334W User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334W Table 2 Front Panel LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LAN 1 4 Green On The NBG334W has a successful 10MB Ethernet connection Blinking The NBG334W is sending receiving data Amber On The NBG334W has a successful 100MB Ethernet connection Blinking The NBG334W is sending receiving data Off The LAN is not connected WAN Green On The NBG334W has a successful 10MB WAN connection Blinking The NBG334W is sending receiving data Amber On The NBG334W has a successful 100MB Ethernet connection Blinking The NBG334W is sending receiving data Off The WAN connection is not ready or has failed WLAN Green On The NBG334W is ready but is not sending r
61. content filtering via DNS query Creating socket failed The NBG334W cannot issue a query because TCP IP socket creation failed port port number Connecting to content filter server fail The connection to the external content filtering server failed License key is invalid The external content filtering license key is invalid Table 88 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION attack TCP UDP IGMP The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF attack ESP GRE OSPF attack ICMP type d The firewall detected an ICMP attack For type and code details code 2d see Table 92 on page 204 land TCP UDP IGMP The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF land ESP GRE OSPF attack land ICMP type d The firewall detected an ICMP land attack For type and code code d details see Table 92 on page 204 ip spoofing WAN TCP The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF ip spoofing WAN ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 code d icmp echo ICMP type d The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 syn flood TCP The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack ports scan TCP The firewall detected a TCP port
62. default selection Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My IP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP My IP Subnet Mask Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Name Type your identification name for the PPTP server WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the default selection Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address Remote IP Enter the remote IP address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address Remote IP Subnet Mask Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field DNS Servers NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG334W s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP
63. devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section 5 2 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See Section 5 2 3 on page 76 for information about this Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients
64. fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary NBG334W User s Guide Appendix H Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia
65. idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays Down when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Tx B s This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port Rx B s This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port Up Time This is the total amount of time the line has been up System Up Time This is the total time the NBG334W has been on Poll Interval s Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics 2 5 6 Summary Wireless Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink in the Status screen View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W in the WLAN Association List and Guest WLAN Association List sections Association means that a wireless client for example your network or computer with a wireless network card has connected successfully to the AP or wireless router using the same SSID channel and security settings F
66. in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless network See Maintenance and Troubleshooting 187 for information on the configuring your Maintenance settings 4 5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG334W 2 The default IP address if the NBG334W is 192 168 1 1 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 2 and 192 168 1 255 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode 4 Type cmd in the dialog box 5 Type ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 249 for information on changing your computer s IP address 6 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 1 as the web address in your web browser See Chapter 6 on page 93 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode NBG334W User s Guide PART II Network Wireless LAN 73 Wireless Tutorial 93 WAN 101 LAN 111 Guest WLAN 117 DHCP 123 Network Address Translation NAT 129 Dynamic DNS 139 Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your
67. in AP Mode see Chapter 4 on page 64 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen Status System Logs Tools Config Mode Sys OP Mode Language gt Status Device Information System Name Firmware Version WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS Guest WLAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Name SSID Security Mode Message NBG334W V3 60 AMS 2 b2 09 21 2007 00 19 cb 22 32 12 00 19 cb 22 32 11 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server 00 19 cb 22 32 11 ZyXEL 6 6 No Security 802 1ib g Unconfigured 06 19 cb 22 32 11 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 Server Guest No Security 100M Full 54M Refresh Interval None z System Up Time 1 22 31 Current Date Time 2000 1 1 1 22 28 System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall Bandwidth Management UPnP Configuration Mode END 77 39 58 Enabled Disabled Enabled Advanced Summary Any IP Table Details BW MGMT Monitor Details DHCP Table Details
68. in the Wireless screen You may still configure and store keys here but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled EAP MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 116 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA 2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard WPA2 IEEE 802 111 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA 272 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Key differences between WPA 2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Messag
69. interface Successful TELNET login Someone has logged on to the router via telnet TELNET login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet Successful FTP login Someone has logged on to the router via ftp FTP login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp NAT Session Table is Full The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full Starting Connectivity Monitor Starting Connectivity Monitor Time initialized by Daytime Server The router got the time and date from the Daytime server g Time initialized by Time server The router got the time and date from the time server a Time initialized by NTP server The router got the time and date from the NTP server Connect to Daytime server fail The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server Too large ICMP packet has been dropped The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large Configuration Change PC Ox x Task ID Ox x The router is saving configuration changes Successful SSH login Someone has logged on to the router s SSH server SSH login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router
70. operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 145 WIndows 95 98 Me Network Configuration Network LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y PAIP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 2c9058 1 7 Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Micros
71. page 120 The home or company network N and Guest WLAN network are independent networks Figure 63 Guest Wireless LAN Network teeter eee tee i Internet y pom This chapter discusses how to configure guest wireless network settings in your NBG334W See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks Pure AP mode doesn t support Guest WLAN NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 9 Guest WLAN 9 1 General Guest WLAN Screen Click Network gt Guest WLAN to open the General screen Figure 64 Network gt Guest WLAN gt General Guest WLAN Setup Enable Guest WLAN Mame SSID Guest Hide SSID Security Security Mode No Security Apply Reset The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 44 Network gt Guest WLAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Guest Select the check box to activate guest wireless LAN WLAN Name SSID The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies a wireless station Wireless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Use the default SSID Guest or enter a unique name in order to distinguish it from other wireless networks in the same area Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning
72. rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the router does that part of the task Further with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have access Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Retype to Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly Confirm Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Connection Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the from ISP default selection Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address Remote IP Enter the remote IP address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address Remote IP Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field Subnet Mask DNS Servers First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the Second DNS NBG334W s
73. requirements of your ISP Back Click Back to return to the previous screen NBG334W User s Guide 55 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Table 15 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 4 4 Your IP Address The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG334W an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP Figure 22 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address STEP STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration OQ Get automatically from your ISP L Used fixed IP address provided by your ISP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is your ISP the default selection If you choose this option skip directly to section 3 4 9 Use fixed IP address Select this option if you were given IP address and or DNS server settings provided by your ISP by the ISP The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 4 5 WAN IP Address Assignment Every computer on the Internet must have a uniq
74. rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule Enable Automatic This field is only applicable when you select the Enable Bandwidth Traffic Classifier Management check box Select this check box to have the NBG334W base on the default bandwidth classes to apply bandwidth management Real time packets such as VoIP traffic always get higher priority Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Figure 89 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Management Bandwidth Application List NO ON User defined Service oo Nyana QN o Check my upstream bandwidth Detection okbps Upstream Bandwidth 1 00000 kbps 10 kbps reserved SSS EM ESCMSUNUUNUM Bg LT ET EE c CE EI TI ee Emails ee Pdonty modi L1 iL 8 ET ICM CI GC ET EU CL ILI VoIP SIP rion FTP Hon E Mail Hion gt MSN Webcam Hion www Hon XBox Live BitTorrent WW Ww Ww WW Tolan High 1 BO Tor
75. s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back 7 d po Search li Folders Ez Address e Network Connections Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled Set up a home or small C m Internet Connection office network 5 Create a new connection LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local Area Connection JJ Network Troubleshooter Enabled E al Accton EN1207D Tx PCI Fast Other Places Control Panel My Network Places i My Documents E My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 Anicon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your NBG334W and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 110 Network Connections My Network Places My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Bac S P Search lic Folders E Address My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks a Add a network place XEL Internet e View network connections Sharing Gateway Invoke Set up a home or small office network 4 View workgroup computers Create Shortcut Rename Properties Other Places 6 Right click on the icon for your NBG334W and select Properties A properties window displays with bas
76. s SSH server Successful HTTPS login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol HTTPS login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 79 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s exceeds the max number of session per host This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host setNetBIOSFilter calloc error The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings readNetBIOSFilter calloc error The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings WAN connection is down A WAN connection is down You cannot access the network through this interface Table 80 Access Control Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded Packet Direction according to the default policy s setting Firewall rule NOT match TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched or did not match a configured firewall rule lt Packet Direction gt lt rule d gt denoted by its number and was blocked o
77. saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s NBG334W User s Guide time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Chapter 19 System Table 75 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time
78. scan attack teardrop TCP The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 88 Attack Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION teardrop UDP The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack code d teardrop ICMP type d The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 illegal command TCP The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack NetBIOS TCP The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack ESP GRE OSPF ip spoofing no routing The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an entry TCP UDP IGMP _ IP spoofing attack entry ICMP type d code d ip spoofing no routing The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack vulnerability ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 code d traceroute ICMP type d The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 Table 89 PKI Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Enrollment successful The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port Enrollment failed The SCEP
79. server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting 270 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of Authentication This appendix discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP Consult your network administrator for more information
80. settings and click Save to continue Figure 53 Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection see the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Figure 54 Link Status gt Profile Name gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt AP MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps gt Security WPA PSK gt Channel 6 Signal Strength 999090970700 Wireless Network Status Statistics Transmit Rate 2 Kbps Receive Rate 0 Kbps Authentication None Network Mode 802 119 Total Transmit 46 Total Receive 3 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Link Quality 99909090977 8 Ifyour connection is successful open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured NBG334W User s Guide WAN This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 7 1 WAN Overview See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens 7 2 WAN
81. specified destination The following lists out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the NBG334W 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access the Internet it sends packets to its default gateway which is not the NBG334W by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN 3 The NBG334W receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the NBG334W 5 When the NBG334W receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the NBG334W and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the NBG334W NBG334W User s Guide 113 Chapter 8 LAN 8 3 LAN IP Screen 8 4 LAN IP Alias Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings Click Network gt LAN Figure 60 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP
82. the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG334W can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and or WAN gt Internet Connection screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 2 Ifthe ISP did not give you DNS server information leave the DNS Server fields set to 0 0 0 0 in the Wizard screen and or set to From ISP in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses 3 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses Figure 23 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses STEP 1 STEP 2 STEPS STEP 4 ffi Internet Configuration My WAN IP Address 172 23 23 49 My WAN IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 First DNS Server 4172 23 51 Second DNS Server 472 23 5 2 Third DNS Server 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP addr
83. the NBG334W See Section 7 3 on page 102 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the NBG334W with the default IP address See Section 7 3 on page 102 6 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the NBG334W using another service such as Telnet If you can access the NBG334W check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG334W does not respond to HTTP e f your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a LAN ETHERNET port e can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the NBG334W 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG334W Log out of the NBG334W in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334W 4 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 25 4 on page 225 e cannot Telnet to the NBG334W See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser e cannot use FTP to uplo
84. the wizard setup Not all Web Configurator screens are available in this mode See Chapter 22 on page 213 for more information 7 Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG334W s settings Please select Wizard Basic or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 3 Resetting the NBG334W If you forget your password or IP address or you cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG334W to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be reset to 192 168 1 1 2 3 1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for five seconds or until the power LED begins to blink and then release it When the power LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the NBG334W restarts 2 4 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode 2 5 The Status Screen in Router Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode For information on the status screen
85. this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time hh mm ss configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date yyyy mm dd configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the NBG334W get the time and date from the time server you specified below Auto Select Auto to have the NBG334W automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply User Defined Time Server Address Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Daylight
86. to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 NBG334W User s Guide 271 Appendix E Wireless LANs PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key
87. to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port UDP user number is specified in the application defined NBG334W User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interf
88. to save your changes back to the NBG334W Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route Screens NBG334W User s Guide Bandwidth Management This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management editing rules and viewing the NBG334W s bandwidth management logs 16 1 Bandwidth Management Overview ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and or subnet You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to different bandwidth rules The NBG334W applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface The NBG334W does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the NBG334W and be managed by bandwidth management The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface LAN to WAN WLAN to WAN WAN to WAN NBG334W must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port WAN to LAN WLAN to LAN LAN to LAN NBG334W must be less than or equal to 100 000 kbps you cannot
89. web page will appear blank or grayed out Activex A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications When you visit an ActiveX Web site ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser where they remain in case you visit the site again Java A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds Cookies Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID Web Proxy A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security administrative control and caching service When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server Keyword Blocking Enable URL The NBG334W can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in Keyword Blocking the domain name or IP address For example if the keyword bad was enabled all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked e g URL http www website com bad html would be blocked Select this check box to enable this feature 150 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering Table 57 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 64 characters Wildcards are not al
90. which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 104 Subnet Mask Identifying Network Number Hoye oe OCTET OCTET t EN 168 1 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit
91. you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 154 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel NBG334W User s Guide 257 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Addres
92. you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 16 7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities If you enable bandwidth management but do not configure a rule for critical traffic like VoIP the voice traffic may then get delayed due to insufficient bandwidth With the automatic traffic classifier feature activated the NB
93. 19 Table 46 Network gt Guest WLAN gt P caccsciciassinsaiies caaculencdeviadvindeciaineoeewieiedscsnvalaagiasaesieniaaeandanaede 120 Table 47 Network gt Guest WLAN gt Bandwidth 1 tendono onte tn tha aga ane ee noa 121 Table 48 Network gt DHCP Server gt General sess nent nennen 124 Table 49 Network gt DACP Server gt AGVORCEG iuiusesuceserieis sero reatu ta abeo repere rene E Exp ke NER EE Ion E Taruna Fave 125 Table 50 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client LIST 1 Irt DERE ERR RI d E apa A XY Rami E FEY t node 127 Table ST Network NAT gt General siecsussccasadsranieiacaquctilaiecass RII AERE REN REEF E ERI S eU dE 131 Eier Mercure e 132 Table 53 Network gt NAT gt PE Laien ed eeu enki ede epp acp E Ape rdi ne Ea sata bat tue paa pl Ee 136 D cz dm rcu eb MR rm 140 Table 55 Security gt Firewall gt General 146 Table 56 Securty gt Firewall gt SAARC Sci cccccacccnicccedacsavecauss innacectacrandectadsinaaduiansshvactuaatinaaaeduncnaacusuns dd 147 Table 57 Secum Content Filter Filet scscsisacs icc scesessdeesesateanenserteadiedeonterwnies vaseriuie E eU2 e PUE E Cela aide ranas 150 Table 58 Security gt Content Filter Schedule oder on os o ser bod i Mo acte D e Pl boda ad 151 Table 59 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route sess 156 Table 60 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setu
94. 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 101 112 IP Address 114 131 IP address 57 dynamic IP alias 114 IP packet transmission 112 Broadcast Multicast Unicast IP Pool 124 J Java 150 NBG334W User s Guide Index L LAN 111 IP pool setup 111 LAN overview 111 LAN Setup 101 LAN setup 111 LAN TCP IP 111 Language 219 Link type 40 65 local user database 76 and encryption 77 Local Area Network 111 Log 193 MAC 86 118 MAC address 75 101 cloning 59 101 MAC address filter 75 MAC address filtering 86 118 MAC filter 86 118 managing the device good habits 33 using FTP See FTP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator Media access control 86 118 Memory usage 40 65 Metric 157 MSN messenger 161 MSN Webcam 161 Multicast 101 112 IGMP 101 112 N NAT 129 131 248 overview 129 port forwarding 129 see also Network Address Translation server sets 129 NAT session 136 NAT Traversal 175 Navigation Panel 40 66 navigation panel 40 66 NetBIOS 110 116 see also Network Basic Input Output System 110 Network Address Translation 129 131 Network Basic Input Output System 116 O Operating Channel 39 65 Output Power 87 P P2P 161 peer to peer 161 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 53 103 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 54 106 Pool Size 124 Port forwarding 129 131 default server 129
95. 3 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page NBG334W User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of
96. 3 3 1 Basic WEP Security Choose Basic WEP to setup WEP Encryption parameters Figure 16 Wizard Step 2 Basic WEP Security CUSTEPA STEP 2 STEPS STEP 4 f WIRELESS LAN Use Passphrase to automatically generates a WEP key The higher the WEP Encryption the higher the security but th the throughput 4 t jit WEP to enable dat ion and select one of the Entering a manual a Key field and selecting ASCII or Hex WEP key input method WEP Encryption 64 bt WEP 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCH characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission Oo ASCH Hex 9 Key 1 Key 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Wizard Step 2 Basic WEP Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Type a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and click Generate The NBG334W automatically generates a WEP key WEP Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to allow data encryption Encryption ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the WEP keys HEX Select this option to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys The preceding Ox is entered automatically Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG334W
97. 34W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN or Guest WLAN See Chapter 9 on page 117 to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG334W sends to the DHCP clients Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To change your NBG334W s static DHCP settings click Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced The following screen displays NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Figure 70 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced Interface Interface Selection Lan z LAN Static DHCP Table m a a aaa 1 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 jooo X DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server fons Relay z 1921681 1 None e 0 0 0 None zl 000 Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Second DNS Server Third DNS Server Interface Selection LAN Static DHCP Select LAN or Guest WLAN for the settings in this screen Table Guest WAN Static DHCP Table This is the index number of the static IP table entry row
98. 5605 17 name Silent Hunter III port 17997 18003 18 name Soldier of Fortune II port 20100 20112 19 name Starcraft port 6112 6119 4000 20 name Star Trek Elite Force II port 29250 29256 21 name SWAT 4 port 10480 10483 22 name Warcraft II and III port 6112 6119 4000 23 name World of Warcraft port 3724 11 5 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The NBG334W records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the NBG334W s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol incoming port the NBG334W forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another
99. 59 Figure 158 Macintosh OS X EORR 2secusssr oben speci dne d dead FR cine pd i an n RR aua Kk 260 Figure 159 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeennennne 261 Figure 160 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General nnne nnne 262 Figure 161 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS usse be rein te EEr pts rente er bar pU sinisisi 262 Figure 162 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate ssssss 263 Figure 163 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO ssssssesssss 263 Figure 164 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO eeeeeeeeeeseeeess 263 Figure 165 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in FRSORGORI uuassodie ciconia i d ebat aan 264 Figure 166 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card eee ertt rnit anna kii tn a Ru ka 264 Figure 167 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties 5 eaesececimue seo betont opc enuai a tote t ay peo tt dde epo pr taa cun 264 22 NBG334W User s Guide List of Figures Figure 168 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network 0 eeecccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeeeeeentaeeeeeeeeaaes 265 PRU Vy TR aE Meer E 266 Figure 179 Infrastructure WLAN pem 267 Powe BUE RE TE OT 268 Figure 172 WISALZERPORN PUTDEBUECEOR nascanna an bula sese bp M ess bep PED Ee Us as 274 NBG334W User s Guide 23 List of Figures NBG334W User s Guide List of Tables List of
100. 8 1 65 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway or default route 192 168 1 1 NBG334W LAN IP This screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG334W s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different rom file It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Figure 24 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address STEP STEP 2 STEP 3 STEPS fi Internet Configuration en the co ter on the e g ou are cloning O Factory default S Clone the computer s MAC Address IP DDELETIEEME O2 1601 33 Set WAN MAC Address O0 5 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 20 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Clone the Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose computer s MAC MAC you are cloning It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer address on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC addr
101. 8 ISAKMP Payload Types continued LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SIG Signature NONCE Nonce NOTFY Notification DE Delete VID Vendor ID NBG334W User s Guide Tools This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG334W 21 1 Firmware Upload Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension e g NBG334W bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for upgrading firmware using FTP TFTP commands Click Maintenance gt Tools Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334W Figure 116 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure File Path Browse Upload The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you wan
102. A screen pops up displaying the generated pre shared key after you click Next Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network Click OK to continue Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG334W your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range If you choose this option skip directly to Section 3 4 on page 52 Choose Basic WEP security if you want to configure WEP Encryption parameters If you choose this option go directly to Section 3 3 1 on page 51 Choose Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security to configure a Pre Shared Key Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK respectively If you choose this option skip directly to Section 3 3 2 on page 52 Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g wireless devices is called a Selection channel Select a channel that is not used by any nearby devices Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving The wireless stations and NBG334W must use the same SSID channel ID and WEP encryption key if WEP is enabled WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled or WPA2 PSK if WPA2 PSK is enabled for wireless communication NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
103. A RR RR RRDA NR RERRERA S AR EnA 93 6 2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG334W and Wireless Client 93 6 2 1 Push Botton Contiguration PED Loses cix pare ped sands d ex dd pac 94 02 4 PIN Egrecois Tipi M 95 6 3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG334W 96 gar iXies iinss eccL cM 98 Chapter 7 WAN cai vi wisn Shick acta tase case 101 FUAN OYONO e 101 Ic MISC SERE 1 caet ENEE AD AA DHRUE RR EFL COM RU ENA KE bra cU IR EE EE REED FUELS EMI EUG 101 PCR Dc d ceiccnteduns edntetagee nae aner e a costes EE EO Ois 101 Os 21a oi Me lg tees eoo Doe ee a n a A 102 15 1 Ethemiet Encspsildio secneia E EN dese mnnens 102 Tat PPPOE BNCADSUIAIOM STREET S 103 LAO PPTP EncspSUIBUDEE susina tinea eaaa eaaa a ENA AE EEA D AAA 106 To Adancod WAN Green Sanii E N 109 Chapter 8 LAN ciiir A S renee 111 NBG334W User s Guide 13 Table of Contents ST LAN OW S 111 A a E T aor 111 8 1 2 System DNS SOryerS m 111 B LAN GP sta notai ead ei ode Iria a Ia i aie ee eas 111 Ded ary LS AGING E A EE uocis tidivis bu eser E qn elaine ean UE 111 82 2 IP Address and Subnet MASK iac sasis com sedi ei pct edat Se tera wise EX eee E airne RE 112 GPS T CE EE c RN RR ERU EET 112 cw
104. All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the NBG334W Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the NBG334W Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management NBG334W User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator 18 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See Section 18 3 on page 176 for configuration instructions 18 1 1 How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 18 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can auto
105. Am ee tian adie aa Wee La 112 B LANP SORS aera cepe bad levee ait aah dc t ke la iy a aie et eds 114 ar a 1 Ul Ege Aan oUt ee Be Onn nen Roe Trea erin tede esp E M LIP P VI Cn ETE MEER 114 ao AWanced LAM SIG sacteatcisvacinsesictacesboissdubrastiilashaiebicsmenieniitccanabuieacksghuepeetdsauetneucedamee ranks 115 Chapter 9 Guest WLAN 117 9 1 General Guest WLAN SGIeOn ciiscescesadisesccdevastsecnedesieseacdcatsianed coer Lea a IU RA AA RM KE A RA AY KR ERA Rn 118 us Guest WLAN NIAE FOr etcetera ieu qute deant eludet vibes E eii duiet de eda ixtun 118 9 3 Guest WLAN IP SOON sessin soto teg ap I UI E T HC REEL e Hk do SR Ryo EEUU A33 HO OI e 119 944 Guest WLAN Bandwidth STEED isis sanc A Eua ka bda ARR epa ERE R bak ER ABR ia RR AM ERR I XER anand 120 Chapter 10 DHC Em TE 123 iD pl MIT rre PR 123 180 2 DHCP Server General SCEN surasini onian E EXEA d oE ERR LM IR E pda ERR Ee Dd A E UD RE EOE 123 10 3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen ermani en inin EE ERRER 124 0 45 C lent Dist CIS Lasdcuuad s enin i sucess dr aa Redde a la ca s ER LRQ C t RR b 126 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT eeclesie eeeeeeee nennen 129 TI LIES uus Femme 129 TEZ UGNI DET aescsoni Decet rier crn tre ttt ter err EI d HD UAE Frat l uen andina dis errr Od odd cL DR rrr 129 11 2 1 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers sssssssssseeee 129 11 2 2 Configuring Server
106. Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS
107. E PHP RU EUER a E E M HR RC TUR HL AX RSEN 31 introducing the Web Configurator ew 35 eiu 47 AP MOUT voe PPS 63 aus e 71 E Tees LAW 73 EES TO Al EU 93 pM 101 El E T E A O A AEE E E E CoL c Au on MU Mono ome sn dd Last dd 111 Guest WEAN 117 NOP siiin ann AAAA a 123 Network Address Translation NAT lt cccdacaneitcesiamioieistniineaiannssnaniacieten pe E Heu DRE INR EE REN 129 Dynamic Bc 139 cau RMTEMTMKT HORA 141 al 143 eredi MN S UT TT 149 Management eO0O O 0O O A A A O O OeeE0 153 Statie Route UNS NN Ta AE EEA AEE EANAN 155 Panoh KaT a PIN UAL eaaa a 159 komot ISHSOQRIIGNE 169 Universal Plug and Play UPDP 1asusecacesikkcunbaniia ctandcansdcensuaosdes KEERN ER eb ET Baer ERR aa 175 Maintenance and Troubleshooting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene een nennen nennen nnnm 187 ATUS L EE EIAI T le Saat hg CO S SU 189 LOGS 193 207 dor eru c se ei eee nden nena eearinie oeee eno ei Eee 213 SyS Op NS
108. ERI I I T NT 246 Table 113 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning 42iioeeeret trepida a hx Pl nera rEE ede tr bep n t eb R ra 247 Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning nri tnnt nre tnde 247 Aie uw nc Tr 269 Table 116 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types 222 eise edad edet tdi a 272 Table 117 Wireless Security Relational Matrix ieeeeeieeeeeesee nennen tnter ntn hannah h an 275 Table TIS Examples or Servio casuessssketevauterieredunpa eq apo aga fete teu tse ce ub v RM be lo IA NE EA 277 NBG334W User s Guide List of Tables NBG334W User s Guide PART Introduction Getting to Know Your NBG334W 31 Introducing the Web Configurator 35 Connection Wizard 47 AP Mode 63 Getting to Know Your NBG334W This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG334W 1 1 Overview The NBG334W acts as either an access point AP or a secure broadband router for all data passing between the Internet and your local network In both AP and Router Mode you can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802 11b g compatible devices In Router Mode a number of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available You can use media bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your network Bandwidth management features allow you to prioritize time sensitive or highly important applications such as Voice over the Internet VoIP 1 2 AP Mode Select A
109. Encapsulation Ethernet x Service Type Standard IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Second DNS Server From ISP 7 722352 C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address 132 158 1 33 Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Service Type Choose from Standard RR Telstra RoadRunner Telstra authentication method RR Manager Roadrunner Manager authentication method RR Toshiba Roadrunner Toshiba authentication method or Telia Login The following fields do not appear with the Standard service type WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the from ISP default selection Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address IP Subnet Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field Mask Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address DNS Servers First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the Second DNS
110. Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turnon your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 159 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices File Profile Help 9 4 l5 gQ x New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts Eg You may configure network devices associated with associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device
111. F 4 for each Key 1 4 A F ASCII C Hex Apply Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 29 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Enter a passphrase password phrase of up to 32 printable characters and click Generate The NBG334W automatically generates four different WEP keys and displays them in the Key fields below WEP Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption Encryption Authentication This field is activated when you select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP in the WEP Method Encryption field Select Auto Open System or Shared Key from the drop down list box ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding 0x that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG334W and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save you
112. Figure 69 Network gt DHCP Server gt General LAN DHCP Setup M Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 1 58 1 33 Pool size 22 Guest WLAN DHCP Setup M Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 1921 68 2 33 Pool Size 6 Apply Reset NBG334W User s Guide 123 Chapter 10 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network gt DHCP Server gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN DHCP Setup Enable DHCP Server Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN or Guest WLAN See Chapter 9 on page 117 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at startup from a server Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise Clear it to disable the NBG334W acting as a DHCP server When configured as a server the NBG334W provides TCP IP configuration for the clients If not DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computers must be manually configured When set as a server fill in the following four fields IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address for LAN or Guest WLAN Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool for LAN or Guest WLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG3
113. G334W automatically assigns a default bandwidth management class and priority to traffic that does not match any of the user defined rules The traffic 1s classified based on the traffic type Real time traffic always gets higher priority over other traffic The following table shows you the priorities between the three default classes AutoClass H AutoClass M and Default Class and user defined rules 6 is the highest priority Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes CLASS TYPE PRIORITY User defined with high priority 6 AutoClass H 5 User defined with medium priority 4 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes CLASS TYPE PRIORITY AutoClass_M 3 User defined with low priority 2 Default Class 1 16 8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen Figure 88 Management Bandwidth MGMT General Service Management M Enable Bandwidth Management M Enable Automatic Traffic Classifier Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply bandwidth management Management Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth
114. G334W to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface Check your remote management settings See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information 25 6 Advanced Features can log in but cannot see some of the screens or fields in the Web Configurator You may be accessing the Web Configurator in Basic mode Some screens and fields are available only in Advanced mode Use the Maintenance gt Config Mode screen to select Advanced mode You may be accessing the Web Configurator in AP Mode Some screens and fields are available only in Router Mode Use the Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode screen to select Router Mode set up URL keyword blocking but can still access a website that should be blocked Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL customize the keyword blocking using commands See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter NBG334W User s Guide PART VI Appendices and Index Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions 229 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 235 IP Addresses and Subnetting 241 Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 249 Wireless LANs 265 Services 277
115. General Use this screen to configure guest wireless LAN settings MAC Filter Use this screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to guest devices or block the guest devices from accessing the NBG334W IP Use this screen to configure guest wireless LAN IP address Bandwidth Use this screen to configure bandwidth settings for the guest wireless network DHCP General Use this screen to enable the NBG334W s DHCP server Server Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG334W Advanced Use this screen to change your NBG334W s port triggering settings DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 5 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Content Filter Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keyword
116. Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 f Internet Configuration Pl Click the Apply Button to Complete the Connection Wi Note If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Finish Button Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process Follow the on screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete Congratulation The Connection Wizard configuration is complete Finish button to complete Connection www zyxel com ck that your d in the suppor Well done You have successfully set up your NBG334W to operate on your network and access the Internet NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard NBG334W User s Guide AP Mode This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG334W is set to AP Mode Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode BS See Chapter 6 on page 93 for an example of setting up a wireless network in AP mode 4 1 AP Mode Overview Use your NBG334W as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network In this mode your device bridges a wired network
117. I MR prr bue emm 264 Anopsndo E Wireless LANS iaceo Un E RM OLo e FURIA NEU mM EN 265 25 5 2 WPAIZI PSK Application Example iiieiuien khe pe aS os a a S ain 274 25 6 3 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example 2 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesensneeeeees 274 Appendix EE Re EDT 277 Appendix Legal intomahoi wnucusienusenxcnuuieieuaia EYE ERU M EU EU ROME EK DEM E GRUbS 281 Appendix H Customer SUPPO 1i esee axe rhe tutu ana A EE RL DER PERDRE eSATA N EREANABL DR EEN 285 i et Y 291 NBG334W User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access In AP Mode 11s terre rrt rera diene eee 31 Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode cccseseccceeeseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneaaceeeeneeeaees 32 Figure d Front Panel qe 33 Figure 4 Change Password SOIIBN ac cnsieneitincssaenicingnsqessssndssasassinankesisiasanssaisulan iassissasunnnsiamnnnensaenineasine 36 Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Scree scrscrecnsikiinnerhi nnan accede ee 38 Figure 6 Any IP Table c a a 43 Figure T Summary BW MGMT MOI ius tadesiienaned gaia Eid bn donee ball eubhediali e oa dia EETA aaa Ea 43 Figues o Somma DHOF TIDIG e P 44 Figure 9 Summan Fasket SD S na AE 44 Figure 10 Summary Wireless Association List i e ei ea erat koh t kk erar rtc E ERR Ea 45 Figure 11 Select
118. IP IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG334W in dotted decimal notation 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The NBG334W supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the NBG334W itself as the gateway for each LAN network To change your NBG334W s IP alias settings click Network gt LAN gt IP Alias The screen appears as shown NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 8 LAN Figure 61 Network gt LAN gt IP Alias IP Alias 1 IP Alias 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 IP Alias 2 IP Alias 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network gt LAN gt IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1 2 Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the NBG334W IP Address Enter the IP address of your NBG334W in dotted decimal notation
119. NBG334W 802 11g Wireless Firewall Router User s Guide Version 3 60 10 2007 Edition 2 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG334W using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the NBG334W Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw NBG334W User s Guide 3 Document Conventions
120. NBG334W See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks 5 1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network amp lt Ses TUI i r y Frag D z AP i 1 4 1 i H i 4 1 1 H i N d 1 1 1 H 1 A 2 i i 4 Au s Pd A o ay B The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wireless clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to interact with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your NBG334W is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentity Iftwo wireless networks overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Requirements To add a wire
121. NBG334W s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS Server server IP address that the ISP assigns Third DNS Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address Address by either using the NBG334W s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is address successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Cli
122. Nickname Type iit 5 physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be Tl X Inactive ethO etho Ethemet 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 160 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General Ethernet Device mx General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO 4 Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address 2 OK 3 Cancel f you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhep from the drop down list Ifyou have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provide
123. P Address Figure 147 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties 21 xl Bindings Advanced Netpios DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Domain Suffix Search Order P Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways If you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel 252 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 148 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer e My Documents fs Outlook Express Y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures B Command Prompt EJ Acrobat Reader 4 0 Tour Windows xP Windows Movie Maker Help and Supp
124. P Mode if you already have a router or gateway on your network which provides network services such as a firewall or bandwidth management The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334W which acts as an access point A The NBG334W allows the wireless computers to share the same Internet access as the other computers connected to the router B on the same network Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode WLAN cw Internet P NBG334W User s Guide 34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334W 1 3 Router Mode Select Router Mode if you need to route traffic between your network and another network such as the Internet and require important network services such as a firewall or bandwidth management The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334W A which has a DSL connection to the Internet The NBG334W is set to Router Mode and has router features such as a built in firewall B Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode n WLAN v Internet O gt f p t a aan DSL 1 4 Router Features vs AP Features The following table shows which features are available in Router or AP Mode Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs AP Mode FEATURE ROUTER MODE AP MODE DHCP YES NO This allows individual clients to obtain IP addresses at start up from a DHCP server Firewall YES NO This establishes a netw
125. PPPoE Connection STEP gt STEP 2 STEP Z gt STEP 4 f Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Service Name optional User Name Password The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access Connection Type Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection Service Name Type the name of your service provider User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the user name above Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 4 3 PPTP Connection Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard BS The NBG334W supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Figure 21 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 f Internet Co
126. PRA SEES ERR HEU oH RAS 37 25 Navigating the Web CORIQUESDUE senerssiskii ra NA 37 2 0 The Status Soren in Router Mode 5o res dia e RD ss niger trenini ii anehi doe EVE kisen 37 ANOV T O ENN a DOT 40 20 2 aA F E aa 43 2 5 3 Summary Bandwidth Management Monitor eeeeccsccceessccceceeeeseceeeeeesseceeeeeensaaes 43 Z0 NOS DACP Table insiren ape tei kd Pc tob cts PER EE Pid Lir du rp ce d EERENS 43 20 5 Summary Packet SIISHOS sssrini meres be tides tendi bett dd oe bc i E pede 44 NBG334W User s Guide LE Table of Contents 2 5 6 Summary Wireless Station DUIS ccasssssicsaesianncccacvasnnnssaelansonscaavanessassiannasnenunnsses 45 Chapter 3 CODnDBCHON VIPATO Lo odere vel A E Ki sd XAR ABA RU XR A A AI RA AR RE PAM MAN QD MN QUARE RE ERR 47 2T HR AN UN 1 eec mte dicen hahaa a neared ite luv eiua tre s iesu 47 3 2 Connection Wizard STEP 1 System Information cei scicceiseceecei enata ree eee 48 Sue T e E L A A A EAA AAE nde pid nbn dante iad ERR CK KI ER HOC KE ED ONU pas 48 oz EO DOSE ee eerie eer Ree t rp PRU EET Ende he rey NE MI MN 49 2 Connection Wizard STEP 2 Wireless LAN Laus eei px ei rti d nno eda REX RU R 49 s WE VEF I SEC AM SE T 51 3 3 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security ceret tereti eren ni irruere ede 52 3 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration eese 52 FED LOONE O M eT 53 28 2 PPPOE COMECON assai iM eben dex bi a ree ped vdd P susci ii
127. This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority This field displays the priority of the application Highest Typically used for voice or video that should be high quality High Typically used for voice or video that can be medium quality Mid Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority For example Internet surfing Low Typically used for non critical background applications such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W 5 8 1 Application Priority Configuration Use this screen to edita WMM QoS application entry Click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Figure 43 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration Application Priority Configuration Name j Service user defined Dest Port b 1965535 Priority Highest gt Apply Cancel See Appendix F on pa
128. Version LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address Name SSID Channel Operating Channel Security Mode 802 11 Mode WPS Interface Status Up 100M Full LAN NBG334W V3 60 AMS 2 b2 09 21 2007 D0 19 cb 22 32 11 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 None 00 19 cb 22 32 11 ZyXEL 6 6 No Security 802 11b g Unconfiqured Up 54M Refresh Interval nene x Refresh Now System Status System Up Time 3 22 54 Current Date Time System Resource 2000 1 1 3 22 51 CPU Usage Memory Usage 6 04 P 58 System Setting Configuration Mode Advanced Summary Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details ER Ready NS NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance System General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask
129. Wizard or Advanced Mode 255 cett rrr eer rr rb eiit dee px ra Eb doa a 47 Figure TZ Geor s LOO a cnissate ey oa teeice sie etedls dta e edi aed dees 48 Figure T3 Welcome to the Connection Wizard 1csauietuieettce eue tebur vs E ao nnicem bon Drac E OR v uctk tu buf Veg dn UE 48 Figure 14 Wizard Step 1 System IOfOFTEI al en 2 suiusse eee cesncee ter tresses rependit e Ene rk o ze pra rab UE vs e bI E 49 Figure T5 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN usui era etd teer itd Ka t Rid RE Et E a AASEN EREA REBEL Eod 50 Figure 16 Wizard Step Z Basic WEF SECUN uci sion ORE SEHEN IQNRPENDL BR ace aunb aoa EN PUR E DER DOTEM ME EEDIQE 51 Figure 17 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security sseeeeene 52 Figure 18 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters 2uuadiessccn eio peto Lebe eiua dd dua opua aqu Reb F6 d ER n did E anai a 53 Figure 19 Wizard Step 3 Ethemet CONMGCHON icio ec oco rue epe ertt ue uo thor p reiini sn renin INI Ga EZ UEE da EpL c EE pELdd 53 Figure 20 Wizard Step 2 PPPOE COMECON ccitece ci Rr OL IR RPoUOISHRYERUL GER SEREUASSMERM APESHOR PATRE PUE GNRN ERR KRS 54 Figure 21 Wizard Sige dude eI rc P 55 Figura 22 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address iussisse beste et pese ket rive bern putre ed t bl diu E pep rdc 56 Figure 23 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses sse 58 Figure 24 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Addr SS iussa crebri eet born opere obw vec RP NINNIN NANANA 59 Figure 25 Wizard Step 4 Bandwidt
130. a network security policy It should never be the only mechanism or method employed For a firewall to guard effectively you must design and deploy it appropriately This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy In addition specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself 13 1 2 Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency however they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support Firewalls of one type or another have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises 13 1 3 About the NBG334W Firewall The NBG334W firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box The NBG334W s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The NBG334W can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network NBG334W User s
131. able 76 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings page see Section 20 2 on page 194 display in the drop down list box Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e mail address specified in the Log Settings page make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs Time This field displays the time the log was recorded See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG334W s time and date Message This field states the reason for the log Source This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Note This field displays additional information about the log entry 20 2 Log Settings You can configure the NBG334W s general log settings in one location Click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings to open the Log Settings screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the NBG334W is to send logs the schedule for when the NBG334W is to send the logs and which logs and or immediat
132. ad download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware NBG334W User s Guide 223 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser 25 3 Internet Access e cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 Ifyou are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 5 Goto Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General Check your System Operation Mode setting Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network 6 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP e cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the NBG334W but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Qui
133. address Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address n Router Mode enable the DHCP Server The NBG334W assigns your computer an IP address on the same subnet n AP Mode the NBG334W does not assign an IP address to your computer so you should check it s in the same subnet See Section 4 5 on page 68 for more information NBG334W User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 Type 1234 default as the password and click Login In some versions the default password appears automatically if this is the case click Login 5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Type a new password and retype it to confirm and click Apply or click Ignore Figure 4 Change Password Screen Please enter a new password Your router is currently using the default password To protect your network from unauthorized users we n change your password at this time ssword x win red i to reme BES The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the NBG334W if this happens 6 Select the setup mode you want to use Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and Wireless setup Click Go to Basic Setup if you want to view and configure basic settings that are not part of
134. address enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO field The following figure shows an example Figure 163 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 NBOOT yes OOT PROTO dhcp SERCTL no EERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet vGWOU Ifyou have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Figure 164 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE ethO0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 165 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 166 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Eth
135. adtoaiana 205 Table 85 Maintenance gt Tools gt FITITIWEBEO cicisccicasecisescosciedececscs donee tbt itae dddot ket da deni kid data cibi ddp rna 207 Table 96 Maintenance Restore Configuration eeeseieiesessieis essei nennen nth thanh nha dean da 209 Table 97 Maintenance gt Contig Mode gt General iecit irt nera rbi dn RFE HE rosd REKEHEU m n FR N eek HH SA MER HU 213 Table 98 Advanced Configuration Opt ONS 12 icio retta bb EXER IY Re S433 Had 4 dad Ya AE agat alos d esu Ride 214 Table 99 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General _ cccee eeceeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeens 217 Table 100 Hardware FealureS e M 229 Tabie TOT Fimea e FONUS oisi ter Peper ee rt tdeo i d id dd Terr reenter ter Perr rte Eco tr tre Tres d 229 Table PAS hee elici e MARRE I Oo o 0 1 SEU 231 Tale 103 Standards BUBPOMEG e raei 231 Table 104 Subnet Mask Identifying Network Number eseeeeeesesiseseeseeieenn nennen tn tnnt 242 TETOS SE r c aee 243 Table 106 Maximum Host WINGS d1iasteessqseadder edlen a dit tdeo rdv dr d vitres 243 Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation laeeeeseieseseeeseseseeeee enne nhanh nth ad nnn haa dd eR Rn a4 243 TABS 109 SUBNET 245 gri mul 246 Hi Su DL em cL TT 246 D mua e 246 Tbe TA EGM I
136. allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 5 2 3 User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user e In the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database Ina RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized
137. ame port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Ifthe Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number Ifthe Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 118 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from TCP UDP 24032 White Pines Software DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable TCP 21 fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail
138. ames password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG334W s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to change your NBG334W s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334W Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG334W Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off Config Mode General This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or features Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer 4 4 Configuring Your Settings 4 4 1 LAN Settings BS Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in AP Mode Click Network gt LAN to see the screen below If you change the IP address of the NBG334W in the screen below you will need to log into the NBG334W again using the new IP address NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 4 AP Mode Figure 32 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP C Get form DHCP Server User Defined LAN IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset The table below describes the labels in the screen Table 24 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get form Select this option to allow t
139. an Hon gt Hu oran m Es Hon 7 a foran s 1 Fish E ou rocas Hion Eu rotam C I Hon E mu Vm ANNI Bs o s E Res o s um BI cy BERTI CN O mE ws m Resa The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Management Bandwidth MGMT Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Check my Click the Detection button to check the size of your upstream bandwidth upstream bandwidth Upstream Enter the amount of bandwidth in kbps 2 to 100 000 that you want to allocate for Bandwidth kbps traffic 20 kbps to 20 000 kbps is recommended The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of the broadband device connected to the WAN port For example set the speed to 1000 Kbps or less if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of 1000 Kbps Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre defined service This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply this bandwidth management rule Service This is the name of the service Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Advanced Setting Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen where you can modify the rule User defined Service Use this table to allocat
140. anced Screen To change your NBG334W s trigger port settings click Network gt NAT gt Advanced The screen appears as shown BS Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time NBG334W User s Guide 135 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 77 Network gt NAT gt Advanced Session Setup Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 512 Port Triggering Rules a en Trigger Port End Port Port End Port BEN 1 b b b b ea b b b b BEN 1 b b b b SEEN jJ b b b b B I b b b 1 b o 6 L b b b b BEEN 1j b b b b SEM X b b b b 2 b b b b ma Reet The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Network gt NAT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Max NAT Firewall Session Per User Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions that a host can create When computers use peer to peer applications such as file sharing applications they may use a large number of NAT sessions If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used In this case no additional NAT sessions can be established and users may not be able to access the Internet Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session Use this field to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions each client computer can establish th
141. and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time Back Click Back to display the previous screen NBG334W User s Guide The default key is key 1 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Table 11 Wizard Step 2 Basic WEP Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 3 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security Choose Extend WPA PSK or Extend WPA2 PSK security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 17 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security STEP T STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 fa WIRELESS LAN from the p d yo 0 ac 2 to log Pre Shared Key qwerty1234 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters You can set up the most secure Key wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Back Click Back to display t
142. and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 141 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 9 Java ae Iv Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 for apple requis eso Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 for apple requis eso requires restart icross bers Java Vn enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing xf gt Restore Defaults NBG334W User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of
143. ange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled you will not receive the e mail logs User Name Enter the user name up to 31 characters usually the user name of a mail account Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Log Schedule This drop down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E mail Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None If you select Weekly or Daily specify a time of day when the E mail should be sent If you select Weekly then also specify which day of the week the E mail should be sent If you select When Log is Full an alert is sent when the log fills up If you select None no log messages are sent Day for Sending Log Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs Time for Sending Log Enter the time of the day in 24 hour format for example 23 00 equals 11 00 pm to send the logs Clear log after sending mail Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the NBG334W sends an E mail of the logs Syslog Logging The NBG334W sends a log to an external syslog server Active Click Active to enable syslog logging Syslog Server IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the syslo
144. apod a dee appa da Haa Ru de 189 Table 75 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting ueaakpopXvetukE br eu exe PP e E REEF ERE EH lY deu xb PE a HERE PEN AER EE 191 Table 76 Maintenance gt Logs gt View LOG iiuuseccosexesctetesesietuct rusa azstri sees dconiasacesseniduessrctorasanestenidecaryieed 194 Table 77 Maintenance Logs gt Lon Settings iusessekaa educ iba Ea edang Ert aka E rk aS GR ka anana 195 Table 72 System Mantenan MEco cet 197 TooToo amn Eno LO nena aie ene ee 198 Table 90 Access Control Logs etc EET 198 Ttable 81 TCP Reset LOS c 198 NBG334W User s Guide List of Tables Tate OS 41 d we Y 199 Nie roxgpep aay Es ern 199 IT CDR LODS 200 j Bo FFF cT 200 Te OE UIP LODS oaesisdesatictomdikirielinn ku E PEE EeDe n a erben naan neat 200 Table 87 Content Filtering LOGOS 2esesecuea iassrsctve sam atac tct temo bcec t domata tir duce butt aepo oto I2 dara koh d qoe ak I adn pE Y toda 200 Hi coger RES 201 jr seo LT 202 TN Ue ahaha iei io oen ed bud Bn ute tee hel led 203 Table S1 6L Sotting Noles sssrini eripere pan Sai eadein dicted adh etapa dedu pad dad loda asa dod aun eoa dd Rd 204 EEG 92 IOMP NOIES e 204 WANS OS SNCS o aea 205 Table 94 RFG 2408 ISAKMP Payload TVEOS asaisiciccisindaiesateraierestoraacdunandaangetiadessianiniiegisan
145. are LAN all 5 Ethernet ports WLAN LAN DHCP server is disabled amp unconfigurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is unreachable In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports including the port labeled WAN There is no WAN port The DHCP server on your device is disabled In AP mode there must be a device with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 1 The following table describes the labels in the General screen Table 99 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Operation Mode Router Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management Access Point Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network Apply Click Apply to save your settings Reset Click Reset to return your settings to the default Router LES If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the Internet NBG334W User s Guide 217 Chapter 23 Sys Op Mode NBG334W User s Guide Language Use this screen to change the language for the web configurator display 24 1 La
146. are to your NBG334W Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG334W Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off Config Mode General This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or features Sys OP General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Mode Router or a Access Point Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 5 2 Summary Any IP Table This screen displays the IP address of each computer that is using the NBG334W via the any IP feature Any IP allows computers to access the Internet through the NBG334W without changing their network settings when NAT is enabled To access this screen open the Status screen see Section 2 5 on page 37 and click Details next to Any IP Table Figure 6 Any IP Table Any IP TABLE Ls 7 1P address ac address Refresh 2 5 3 Summary Bandwidth Management Monitor Select the BW MGMT Monitor Details hyperlink in Status screen View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use Figure 7 Summar
147. associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device After you select to use a security addional options appears in this screen See 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 5 4 sections Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication Note If you enable the WPS function only No Security WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are available in this option Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 5 5 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption LES If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG334W your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General No Security Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz Operating Channel Channel 006 Security Security Mode No Security Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Wireless No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply
148. ay is directly connected and the NBG334W has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the NBG334W knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node router R1 However the NBG334W is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node router R1 via gateway router R2 The static routes are for you to tell the NBG334W about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 84 Example of Static Routing Topology N1 T a m 15 2 IP Static Route Screen Click Management gt Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen The following screen displays NBG334W User s Guide 155 Chapter 15 Static Route Screens Figure 85 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Rules oN OOH hk WN SS a ee 1 ns test 9 1 2 3 4 10 1 2 25 Gd Ud Ud UR UH GA UR E E B B B E E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an individual static route The first entry is for the default route and not editable Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Active This icon is turned on when this static route is active Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to e
149. cations between wireless clients BSS Traffic or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Output Power Set the output power of the NBG334W in this field If there is a high density of APs within an area decrease the output power of the NBG334W to reduce interference with other APs 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W Select 802 11g to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W Select 802 11b g to allow either IEEE802 11b or IEEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W The transmission rate of your NBG334W might be reduced NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Table 33 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 8 Quality of Service QoS Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service such as e mail VoIP or FTP a priority level Click Netw
150. cc cccceseeeeeeeeenseeseeeseneeceeeeseseeseeeeseseaseeeeensaes 86 Figure 41 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced aos ccicsccccccous sence ses enesntnanseomesenrnsnnnenessmnnnnerssn tpe dde 87 Figure 42 Network Wireless LAN gt QoS isis is ssid acas yer eta elei nnr a RI Ga oe GR Ex pex aca so zd a pa 88 Figure 43 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration ssesesss 89 i ls MUI M 91 Foue do OG pd INN NN T OT LE 92 Figure 46 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet diiicciecinctssocinneaoandouaniussrionadiaem mane 93 Figure 47 Example WPS Process PBO Method 15 1 irr re sip eh L1 E RPe ERE PERPE XS oor FERA ERR KIA 95 Figure 48 Example WPS Process PIN Method eere reat Entra tk E rh a au Eta ad n cda 96 Figure 49 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General sisccssiccccciessnsccscassisecesssssecoousasnerrom pe rte pape ELI eue prre up ronn 97 odi 0 Sales AF pl M 98 Figure 51 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t eccccceeesecceceeeeseececeeeneecaeeneneeeee 99 Figure 352 SECurity SOUINGS c R 99 Figure oo CONi OIO eaa 99 Figui oe LOS O US eaa a R 100 Figure 55 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation seseesss 102 Figure 56 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation
151. ck Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 4 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG334W supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334W rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG334W does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation Figure 56 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parame
152. ck Start Guide and Section 1 7 on page 33 Reboot the NBG334W If the problem continues contact your ISP O N e The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 7 on page 33 If the NBG334W is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving the NBG334W closer to the AP if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on 3 Reboot the NBG334W 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for bandwidth management If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider changing the allocations e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications 25 4 Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG334W you lose all ofthe changes you have made The NBG334W re loads its default settings and the password resets to 1234 You have to
153. computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the NBG334W and access the Internet The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a NBG334W is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet 112 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 8 LAN Figure 59 Any IP Example 192 168 10 1 a w inh Tc E 2 192 168 10 1 Internet 192 168 1 1 The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the NBG334W s IP address BS You must enable NAT to use the Any IP feature on the NBG334W Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the NBG334W to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its
154. configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port LAN to WLAN WAN to WLAN WLAN to WLAN NBG334W must be less than or equal to 54 000 kbps you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port 16 2 Application based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications like VoIP Web FTP E mail and Video for example 16 3 Subnet based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management The following figure shows LAN subnets You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B Figure 87 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example LAN WAN A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 UN Internet FEN cw a Tn No B 492 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 16 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets Table 61 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example TRAFFIC TYPE FROM SUBNET A FROM SUBNET B VoIP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps FTP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps E mail 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Video 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 16 5 Bandwidth Management Priorities The following table des
155. create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button See Section 6 2 1 on page 94 This is the easier method PIN Configuration create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client s PIN Personal Identification Number in the NBG334W s interface See Section 6 2 2 on page 95 This is the more secure method since one device can authenticate the other NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial 6 2 1 Push Button Configuration PBC 1 Make sure that your NBG334W is turned on and that it is within range of your computer 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client this example uses the NWD210N driver and utility in your notebook 3 In the wireless client utility find the WPS settings Enable WPS and press the WPS button Start or WPS button 4 Log into NBG334W s web configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network gt Wireless Client gt WPS Station screen Your NBG334W has a WPS button located on its panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility Both buttons have exactly the same function you can use one or the other It doesn t matter which button is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one The NBG334W sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG334W securely The fo
156. cribes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG334W forwards out through an interface Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED Mid Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Low This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users 16 6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION Xbox Live This is Microsoft s online gaming service that lets you play multiplayer Xbox games on the Internet via broadband technology Xbox Live uses port 3074 VoIP
157. ct by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces 6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active 7 Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 13 2 Triangle Routes If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the NBG334W s LAN IP address return traffic may not go through the NBG334W This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route This causes the NBG334W to reset the connection as the connection has not been acknowledged You can have the NBG334W permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network not reset the connection Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the NBG334W A better solution is to use IP alias to put the NBG334W and the backup gateway on separate subnets 13 2 1 Triangle Routes and IP Alias You can use IP alias instead of allowing triangle routes IP Alias allow you to partition your network into logical sections over the same interface By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets all returning network traffic must pass through the NBG334W to your LAN The following steps describe such a scenario NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The NBG334W reroutes the packet to Gateway A which is in Subnet 2 3 The reply fro
158. ct this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide LAN This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 8 1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server manage IP addresses and partition your physical network into logical networks 8 1 1 IP Pool Setup The NBG334W is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses excluding the NBG334W itself in the lower range 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1 32 for other server computers for instance servers for mail FTP TFTP web etc that you may have 8 1 2 System DNS Servers Refer to the IP
159. d Figure 161 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS MANetwork Configuration File Profile Help B 9 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may configure the system s hostname domain name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network n Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens 262 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 162 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0 configuration file where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor f you have a dynamic IP
160. d for particular services NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 74 Network gt NAT gt Application Game List Update File Path Browse Update Add Application Rule Active Service Name user Defined 7 Port Ex 10 20 30 40 Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset Application Rules Summary Server IP Modify e acive name oe e _ Modify 1 HTTP 80 10 2 3 4 9 Battlefield 1942 14567 22000 23000 23009 27900 28900 172 12 2 3 Coan nok WN Gd Ui UU OU UR UR UR D Eb E E E E E E E E B e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 NAT Application LABEL DESCRIPTION Game List Update A game list includes the pre defined service name s and port number s You can edit and upload it to the NBG334W to replace the existing entries in the second field next to Service Name File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the txt file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Update Click Update to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Add Application Rule Active Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address Cl
161. d odii vum d ERA aaia 53 de o PPIP On s arniarna Len p td tad oco oy Teu Ua ele OL RM eb End 54 t ECWlcs mE 56 3 4 5 WAN IP Address ASSIODNIDIE iieissiseeetessso precisa eyst ida pr tX py Ai pp IR or sees 56 3 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask eiesecia seasarewud etm etri RP pA CREE RE RE t aer RP ctr 57 341 7 DNS Server Address Ass TIGRE iussis ced een iri proc bee rennin vatican ct Dvd 57 3 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment eese 58 AL NAN MAC PAGING cuite c ox ROME OP RI qe d e peIE ERE REP ae hid t E EE Maan 59 3 5 Connection Wizard STEP 4 Bandwidth management sess 60 200 Connection Wizard CORDIGUO aiu exer ERE cia ERRER dr o iaa Ean EUH bua ERE ER M eI aa Po ER RV da 60 Chapter 4 fud o ee 63 MEE ssi 61 e 63 422 Soling your NBGOSSCATUD AF MODS 1uuissescienienm teXHn pA ER RAMARO WARHRL GG EXMLAXUH RM I OR ead 04S 63 4a The Staus Sareen n AP oor ame eR 64 4S1 Navigalon Panel siraan a e aa aii 66 4A Configuring Your SAMA NII Sica pas T pha I TT 67 ATEON S sce 67 4 4 2 WLAN and Maintenance Seltllije iussisse prt et rrr It nba t hope S 1e pb ys dd PR d dg 68 4 5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode eeeeeeeesesse esee ente nnnnnna 68 Part IL oc 9 71 Chapter 5 MAPS LAN mE
162. dden Web site The web site is in the forbidden web site list s Contains ActiveX The web site contains ActiveX 9 s Contains Java applet The web site contains a Java applet s Contains cookie The web site contains a cookie NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 87 Content Filtering Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION 3 Proxy mode The router detected proxy mode in the packet detected s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list but it did not return the category type s s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list and returned the category type s cache hit The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache but does not know the category type oo s 3s cache hit The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache and knows the category type oo S Trusted Web site The web site is in a trusted domain oo S When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn t select the Block Matched Web Site check box the system forwards the web content Waiting content filter server timeout The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period DNS resolving failed The NBG334W cannot get the IP address of the external
163. de Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet Figure 128 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General System Operation Mode Router Access Point Note Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Access Point In this mode all Ethernet ports are bridged together The device allows the wireless equipped computer can communicate with a wired network Apply Reset If you select Router Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 129 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General Router x A Ports are LAN 4 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN WAN LAN DHCP server is configurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is configurable In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet ports have different IP addresses The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on your local network The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 1 You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings If you select Access Point the following pop up message window appears NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 23 Sys Op Mode Figure 130 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General AP x A Ports
164. dows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen NBG334W User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 136 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options 3 peme General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet MER zone Medium privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Cc information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 137 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop u
165. dress iiis repr RR EERRDIDNANERARNA YR REHRPIPIR RUPEM E AREE RSA 56 Table 17 Private IF Address Rangos uuusetcdatuese ditm died co p MAL tradet d i o e n br UHR 56 Table 18 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses 1 eene 58 Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses 59 Table 20 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAG Address cetera tta totes t d XS HIER RR ERR etd AaS 59 Table 21 Wizard Step 4 Bandwidth Management 1 rer eren ebee tin k Rhe kann E Re ERN ER UEKREER rankan 60 Table 22 Web Configurator Status SOFODEI esser idemieiu rd eio deti diiit d eek ette d oco ed tiun dido et dad 65 Table 23 Screens SUMMA escent copes ets edn bth t iE E vm pedes Lp E aaia Eai vida b EEN 66 Table 24 Network LAN SIP Lu ssstetsu beri te SER er een aS YE RE epo AR ERR Eben prp iin 68 Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication ssssssssssssssssee 76 He uk nu ES dei TOT 79 Table 27 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General sssssieccasccss cass secsaiaciscaseaatiedemntaavteamantgoisomn ceo Cotta Lieu eva ade 80 Tete 20 Velo No SQOUEIBE aussen cernit idi pra debo v sr rS NR E RS REI A asa 81 Table 29 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP sssssssssssssssseeeeeeneneenne 82 Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK sse 83 Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA WPA2 ssssss
166. e Time of Day to Block 24 Hour Format Select the time of day you want service blocking to take effect Configure blocking to take effect all day by selecting All Day You can also configure specific times by selecting From and entering the start time in the Start hour and Start min fields and the end time in the End hour and End min fields Enter times in 24 NBG334W User s Guide hour format for example 3 00pm should be entered as 15 00 Chapter 13 Firewall Table 56 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Misc setting Bypass Triangle Select this check box to have the NBG334W firewall ignore the use of triangle Route route topology on the network Max NAT Firewall Session Per User Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions that a host can create Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again NBG334W User s Guide Content Filtering This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI 14 1 Introduction to Content Filtering Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords 14 2 Restrict Web Features The NBG334W can block web features such as Activ
167. e if available auto short or long To set up your wireless network without an AP or wireless router make sure wireless network cards adapters use the same following settings Network type Ad Hoc SSID Channel wireless standard IEEE 802 11b g b g ora Security None WEP 64bit 128bit or 256bit key ASCII or Hex 5 2 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 5 2 1 SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 5 2 2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address 1s usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is
168. e 143 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting accessere eremitae tna 244 Figure 144 Subnetting Example After Subnetting ccccccccccccesseccccceeeseacaeeeensecaeeenenseaceeeesseacaeeeeneees 245 Figure 145 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration 5 2 csccna eor cct xr o Ida qae entia oy a pp vna S Erbe v Yo ak kRtEUn 250 Figure 146 Windows 95 98 Me TUPNP Properties IP Address 2st aeter t eta 251 Figure 147 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration sseeeeeeees 252 Figure 149 Windows AP SIar MOM TESTI 253 Figure 149 Windows AP Control PAFIGl usssoseubosectenasquxzen Maece agi OG sued ion aceto tut d ga ee a 253 Figure 150 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties uusssssee 254 Figure 151 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties cesses esci nnne tnam 254 Figure 152 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties eeeeeeeeeeeeenenen nnne 255 Figure 153 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties 1 rertideitkp teinte porter dne rex P CRe e Fon per E nEX EE AERERM 256 Figure 154 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties eeeescesesieeeeeeeneen enin 257 Figure 155 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Men 1er tte rnit ea nent Lm nha ERR etta ta n Lh x ak xa nt ux AA 258 Figure Too qe 11 PRI germ 258 Figure 157 Macintosh O5 Xs Apple Menu 25 5 irx ii er th EAR PEEEREUI A LEE ont IRE Ede E EV o b RB Pp ERR u eds 2
169. e Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x In addition to TKIP WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server It includes a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically WPA2 AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the
170. e Pines Software DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IPSEC TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service IPSEC TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file s
171. e alerts the NBG334W to send An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies active X and so on Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as soon as the log is full see Log Schedule Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access Control may result in many e mails being sent NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Figure 115 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings Log Settings E mail Log Settings Mail Server FI Outgoing SMTP Server NAME or IP Address Mail Subject Send Log to 4 E Mail Address Send Alerts to as E Mail Address SMTP Authentication User Name Password Log Schedule None Day for Sending Log Sunday El Time for Sending Log b hour b minute Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging Active Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Server NAME or IP Address Log Facility Local 1 Active Log and Alert Log Send immediate alert System Maintenance r System Errors System Errors Access Control Access Control Blocked Web Sites TCP Reset Blocked Java etc Packet Filter Attacks ICMP Rem
172. e eit e orna addi inaudita 210 alic uce cM UN UU 210 Chapter 22 ds lepra QN 213 Chapter 23 Be oo Me ara i N 215 AURS CS Ker 215 MM ME 215 E13 AB unen deni eU e riu oM Om 215 43 2 Selecting System Operation Mode isset spent trattare pha a a Eb ph annsa tian sues buc i esq RE UE 216 Chapter 24 BO T M 219 241 Lungudge OUISIBH aui asc t dex Ga ad HH UNS OG ENET Tree o dU nO GO o dc E 219 Chapter 25 D pe er NATL A 221 25 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS sseeesee een 221 25 2 PUSAN Accass and Log isse ptr d iren Ud aa ager da doe ir a uc Pado a e Lam 222 209 MOm ACEO qe T Em A AEE EAA EE Ean A 224 25 4 Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults eee eene nnnnnne 225 25 5 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting x4 rint het Ert Fat da Red t eite 225 zb PONTO FOSIIPEB peaa 226 Part VI Appendices and Index sees 227 Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions 229 NBG334W User s Guide Table of Contents Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions sssss 235 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting cccccccccccecceccceecceeceeeceeecceeceeeceeeeeeeseeetenteeess 241 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address ssssssss HH 249 G
173. e specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications and or subnets This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 67 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply this bandwidth management rule Direction Select To LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the LAN Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the WAN Select To WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the WLAN Service Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 19 alphanumeric characters including spaces Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen See Section 16 9 1 on page 167 for more information Click the Remove icon to delete a rule Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 9 1 Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications and or subnets click the Edit icon in the Application List or User defined Service table of the Advanced screen
174. e up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Type the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 3 Connection Wizard STEP 2 Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 15 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN STEP STEP 2 STEPS STEPS ff WIRELESS LAN ame given to your w k It may be possible to see multiple rom your home or s a name that you will be able to Name SS ZyXEL Security Extend APA2 PSK with customized key Channel Selection Channel 06 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Name SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN If you change this field on the NBG334W make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Security Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose Auto to have the NBG334W generate a pre shared key automatically
175. e was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return 21 2 Configuration Screen See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for transferring configuration files using FTP TFTP commands Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Figure 120 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset 21 2 1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up save the NBG334W s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your NBG334W is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The back
176. e wireless stations s wireless settings See Section 6 2 1 on page 94 Click this to start WPS aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization Or input station s Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless PIN number station s wireless settings See Section 6 2 2 on page 95 Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station s utility Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization 92 NBG334W User s Guide Wireless Tutorial 6 1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point AP and wireless client a notebook B in this example for wireless communication B can access the Internet through the AP wirelessly Figure 46 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet N Internet w l gt U 6 2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG334W and Wireless Client This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS This example uses the NBG334W as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook BS The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCI card There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection This tutorial shows you how to do both Push Button Configuration PBC
177. eX controls Java applets cookies and disable web proxies 14 3 Days and Times The NBG334W also allows you to define time periods and days during which the NBG334W performs content filtering 14 4 Filter Screen Click Security gt Content Filter to open the Filter screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering Figure 82 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter Trusted IP Setup 4 trusted computer has full access to all blocked resources 0 0 0 0 means there is no trusted computer Trusted Computer IP Address D 0 0 0 Restrict Web Features activex java Cookies web Proxy Keyword Blocking Enable URL Keyword Blocking Keyword Add Keyword List bad gambling Delete Clear All Message to display when a site is blocked Denied Access Message Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted Computer To enable this feature type an IP address of any one of the computers in your IP Address network that you want to have as a trusted computer This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers Restrict Web Select the box es to restrict a feature When you download a page containing a Features restricted feature that part of the
178. ear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Service Name Type a name of up to 31 printable characters to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name Otherwise select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name The predefined service name and port number s will display in the Service Name and Port fields 132 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 52 NAT Application continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Type a port number s to be forwarded To specify a range of ports enter a hyphen between the first port and the last port such as 10 20 To specify two or more non consecutive port numbers separate them by a comma without spaces such as 123 567 Server IP Address Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port s specified in the Port field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table Reset Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one Application Rules Summary This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled Name This field displays a name to identify this rule Port This field displays the port number s Server IP Address T
179. eceiving data through the wireless LAN T I Blinking The NBG334W is sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed WPS WPS WiFi Protected Setup automatically sets up security on your wireless network This function is currently unavailable NBG334W User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access the NBG334W web configurator and provides an overview of its screens 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG334W via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions or Safari 2 0 or later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your NBG334W hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG334W refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type http 192 168 1 1 as the website
180. een afresh 7 5 Advanced WAN Screen To change your NBG334W s advanced WAN settings click Network gt WAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 58 Network gt WAN gt Advanced Multicast Setup Multicast Allow Trigger Dial Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN None Y Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 WAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Select IGMP V 1 IGMP V 2 or None IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 computer on the WAN Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a Allow between LAN and WAN Sele
181. el Selection Operating Channel Security Security Mode Pre Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer M Enable Wireless LAN SSID_Example3 Channel 06 2437MHz Channel 006 WPA PSK Y ThisismyWWPA PSKpre sharedkey n seconds fas00 In Seconds fisoo In Seconds Reset 5 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Figure 50 Status AP Mode ZyXEL gt Status Status Refresh Interval one z Device Information System Status System Name System Up Time 3 22 54 irmware Version j i Current Date Time 2000 1 1 3 22 51 LAN Information System Resource Refresh Now MAC Address 00 19 cb 22 32 11 CPU Usage E eo IP Address 192 168 1 1 Memory Usage 58 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 System Setting DHCP None Configuration Mode Advanced WLAN Information MAC Address Name D 00 19 cb 22 32 11 XF Channel 6 Operating Channel 6 Security Mode No Security 802 11 Mode 802 11b g WPS Unconfigured Interface Status Summary Packet Statistics Details WLAN tian Datail a 6 4 Configure Your Notebook BS We use the ZyXEL M 302 wirele
182. eless LAN Figure 168 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network A B C e BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Figure 169 Basic Service Set kS P B mm m m ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Figure 170 Infrastructure WLAN
183. ems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space NBG334W User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later
184. ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide Logs This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG334W s logs Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations 20 1 View Log The web configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG334W s logs in one location Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 20 2 on page 194 Options include logs about system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites blocked web features such as
185. ens of each feature are turned on Advanced or not Basic Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG334W port types The port types are WAN LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary Any IP Table Use this screen to view details of IP addresses assigned to devices not in the same subnet as the NBG334W BW MGMT Monitor Use this screen to view the NBG334W s bandwidth usage and allotments DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W 2 5 1 Navigation Panel Use the sub menus on the na
186. ent NBG334W Continuous Access Mode bz hdd Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations Push Button Or input station s PIN Note auto H Continuous Access Mode bs BR C rama teet 25327518 WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Authentication by PIN X uunmmmmmmmmmmm SECURITY INFO f COMMUNICATION 6 3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG334W This example shows you how to cofnigure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG334W SSID SSID Example3 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Channel 6 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG334W The instructions require that your hardware is connected see the Quick Start Guide and you are logged into the web configurator through your LAN connection see Section 2 2 on page 35 Make sure the E hoOnD Open the Wireless LAN gt General screen in the AP s web configurator nable Wireless LAN check box is selected Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply Figure 49 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup Name SSID Hide SSID Chann
187. eral Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter This connection uses the following items E Client for Microsoft Networks 8 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks CC poses gt Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 152 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways
188. erence Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation NBG334W User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help fa FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter m
189. ernal authentication server and your NBG334W The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the NBG334W The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your NBG334W The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 5 6 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG334W to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices Allow or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the NBG334W Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices t
190. ernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface eth0 OK 25 6 1 Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 167 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bceast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost 264 NBG334W User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an Ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad hoc wir
191. ernet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 IP Alias IP Alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface with the NBG334W itself as the gateway for each subnet Logging and Tracing Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the NBG334W to an external UNIX syslog server PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up over Ethernet Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The NBG334W supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play UPnP The NBG334W can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network Table 102 Feature Specifications FEATURE SPECIFICATION Number of Static Routes 7 Number of Port Forwarding Rules 12 Number of NAT Sessions 2048 Number of Address Mapping Rules 10 Number of Bandwidth Management 3 Classes Number of DNS Name Server Record 3 Entries The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the NBG334W Table 103 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 NBG334W User s Guide
192. ervice that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 64 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables
193. es Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the NBG334W If the problem continues contact the vendor ah WD NBG334W User s Guide Ea Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 25 2 NBG334W Access and Login e don t know the IP address of my NBG334W 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the NBG334W by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG334W it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser Set your device to Router Mode login see the Quick Start Guide for instructions and go to the Device Information table in the Status screen Your NBG334W s IP address is available in the Device Information table Ifthe DHCP setting under LAN information is None your device has a fixed IP address Ifthe DHCP setting under LAN information is Client then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network 3 If your NBG334W is a DHCP client you can find your IP address from the DHCP server This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more informat
194. ess in this field The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL Cable modem or router My WAN IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in this field Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field System DNS Server Address Assignment if applicable DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG334W uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server First DNS Server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server you must use IP addresses Third DNS Server when configuring DDNS and the time server Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3 4 9 WAN MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 32 192 16
195. ess you want to use Address Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3 5 Connection Wizard STEP 4 Bandwidth management Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the NBG334W s WAN LAN or WLAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to the traffic type This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users Figure 25 Wizard Step 4 Bandwidth Management STEP E STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 f Bandwidth Management BM Ii Enable BM for all traffic automatically The following fields describe the label in this screen Table 21 Wizard Step 4 Bandwidth Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable BM for all traffic Select the check box to have the NBG334W apply bandwidth management automatically to traffic going out through the NBG334W s WAN LAN HomePlug AV or WLAN port Bandwidth is allocated according to the traffic type automatically Real time packets such as VoIP traffic always get higher priority Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 6 Connection Wizard Complete Click Apply to save your configuration NBG334W User s
196. est message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message Table 93 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION msg msg note note devID lt mac address last three lt Facility 8 Severity Mon dd This message is sent by the system RAS displays as hr mm ss hostname the system name if you haven t configured one when the src srcIP srcPort router generates a syslog The facility is defined in the web dst lt dstIP dstPort gt MAIN MENU gt LOGS gt Log Settings page The severity is the log s syslog class The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix The devID is the last three characters of the numbers gt cat lt category gt MAC address of the router s LAN port The cat is the same as the category in the router s logs The following table shows RFC 2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type Table 94 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SA Security Association PROP Proposal TRANS Transform KE Key Exchange ID Identification CER Certificate CER_REQ Certificate Request HASH Hash NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 94 RFC 240
197. et planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 113 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO NOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO T ERE SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 NBG334W User s Guide 247 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends o
198. example 130 local server 131 port numbers services port speed 40 66 Power Specification 229 PPPoE 53 103 benefits 54 dial up connection see also Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 53 PPTP 54 106 see also Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 54 Preamble Mode 269 priorities 79 Private 157 product registration 283 Q QoS 79 QoS priorities 79 Quality of Service QoS 88 120 NBG334W User s Guide Index R RADIUS 270 Shared Secret Key 271 RADIUS Message Types 270 RADIUS Messages 270 RADIUS server 76 registration product 283 related documentation 3 Remote management 169 and NAT 170 and the firewall 169 FTP 172 limitations 169 remote management session 169 system timeout 170 Reset button 37 210 Reset the device 37 Restore configuration 209 Restrict Web Features 150 RF Radio Frequency 230 RoadRunner 103 Roaming 86 119 roaming 77 requirements 78 router 215 Router Mode 215 RTS Request To Send 268 RTS Threshold 267 268 RTS CTS Threshold 87 S safety warnings 6 Security Parameters 275 Service and port numbers 162 Service Set 80 Service Set IDentification 80 118 Service Set IDentity See SSID services and port numbers 277 and protocols 277 Session Initiated Protocol 161 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 196 SIP 161 SMTP 196 SNMP 144 SSID 39 65 73 80 118 Static DHCP 124 Static Route 155 Static route and remote node overview Status 37 subnet 241 Subne
199. f the default is not defined the service request is simply discarded NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT BS Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 11 2 2 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168133 amp LAN WAN b 192 168 1 1 Wi C B 192 168 1 34 JE r 2s Internet T es c 192 168 1 35 ES Ea Sul 11 3 General NAT Screen Click Network gt NAT to open the General screen Figure 73 Network NAT General NAT Setup M Enable Network Address Translation Default Server Setup Default Server 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Network gt
200. formation about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The NBG334W supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the NBG334W queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the NBG334W periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the NBG334W LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 8 2 4 Any IP Traditionally you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the NBG334W to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the NBG334W In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the NBG334W With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the NBG334W allows a
201. g server that will log the selected categories of logs Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server Refer to the syslog server manual for more information Active Log and Alert Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record Send Immediate Alert Select log categories for which you want the NBG334W to send E mail alerts immediately Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs 20 3 Log Descriptions This section provides descriptions of example log messages Table 78 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Time calibration is successful The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server Time calibration failed The router failed to get information from the time server WAN interface gets IP s A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP PPPoE PPTP or dial up server DHCP client IP expired A DHCP client s IP address has expired DHCP server assigns s The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client Successful WEB login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface WEB login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator
202. ge 277 for a list of commonly used services and destination ports The following table describes the fields in this screen Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Application Priority Configuration Name Type a description of the application priority NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 e FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files including large files that it may not be possible to send via e mail FTP uses port number 21 WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser e User Defined User defined services are
203. h LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Management Select this to turn on bandwidth management for the Guest WLAN for Guest WLAN network Priority This field displays the priority of the application High Typically used for voice or video that can be medium quality Mid Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority For example Internet surfing Low Typically used for non critical background applications such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications Maximum Bandwidth Enter a number to specify maximum bandwidth the Guest WLAN network can use Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reset the changes in this screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 9 Guest WLAN 122 NBG334W User s Guide DHCP 10 1 DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG334W s LAN and or Guest WLAN as DHCP server s or disable them When configured as a server the NBG334W provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or Guest WLAN or else the computer must be manually configured 10 2 DHCP Server General Screen Click Network gt DHCP Server The following screen displays
204. h Management ecccccessecceceeessecceceeeseeeceecneneecaeeeeeseecaeenenseaee 60 Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save ieu sei bci ropa t ttt LER UII ask seecndesssnadwuus RBRUM cO LAB EEEE E A sane 61 Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete aec iectcer vbt de eire eio Ebr Fix dde E Ebrei a 61 Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode eese nennen enhn nn nn nane sena anta aane iias 63 Figure 29 Maintenance Sys OP Mode gt General etri treten tret titre etri eR Er sii rrna 64 Figure SO Stats D M 64 Foue Ji Monu AF MOTE i eect x 66 route 22 Netware LAM E d ernea aaa 68 Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Newark 44 2 t to rn irae aaa aes 73 Figure 34 R aming Example soot ete et Feat oido errs Mann eer er er en tun a cede ciet eed 78 Figure 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General sisiscccssisssencsctsassecccestsseecccsiseseacessssesncecestetecccersennen coneeeniees 80 Figure 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General No Security eese 81 Figure 37 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP ccccsessccccceesecccceeeeseececeeeetesceeenseaae 82 Figure 38 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK ssseeeene ee 83 NBG334W User s Guide List of Figures Figure 39 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA WPA2 csssssesssesseeenn eene nennen nenne 84 Figure 40 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter 00 cc cc
205. he NBG334W to obtain an IP address from a DHCP DHCP Server server on the network You must connect the WAN port to a device with a DHCP server enabled such as a router or gateway Without a DHCP server the NBG334W will have no IP address You need to find out the IP address the DHCP server assigns to the NBG334W and use that address to log in to the NBG334W again User Defined Select this option to set the NBG334W s IP address This setting is selected by LAN IP default Check the IP address is on the same domain as other devices on your network IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation The default setting is 192 168 1 1 If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address IP Subnet The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Mask NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W Gateway IP Type the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination In AP Mode the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 4 4 2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings
206. he highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 108 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER EAS ae IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 109 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 110 Sub
207. he previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration The NBG334W offers three Internet connection types They are Ethernet PPP over Ethernet or PPTP The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard does not detect a connection type you must select one from the drop down list box Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select 52 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 18 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 fi Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type Ethernet PPP over Ethernet PPTP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet PPPoE Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection If your ISP gave you a an IP address and or subnet mask then select PPTP PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial up connection 3 4 1 Ethernet Connection Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Figure 19 Wizard Step 3 Ethernet Connectio
208. he router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times board d line d channel d call d s CO2 OutCall Connected d s The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call is connected board d line d channel d call d s CO2 Call Terminated The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call was disconnected Table 85 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION ppp LCP Starting The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage has started ppp LCP Opening The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is opening opening ppp CHAP Opening The PPP connection s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is Starting ppp IPCP The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting ppp IPCP Opening The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening ppp LCP Closing The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is closing ppp IPCP Closing The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing Table 86 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall Table 87 Content Filtering Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s Keyword blocking The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword s Not in trusted web The web site is not in a trusted domain and the router blocks all traffic list except trusted domain sites s Forbi
209. hen a dynamic firewall session timed out The default timeout values are as follows ICMP idle timeout 3 minutes UDP idle timeout 3 minutes TCP connection three way handshaking timeout 270 seconds TCP FIN wait timeout 2 MSL Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header TCP idle established timeout s 150 minutes TCP reset timeout 10 seconds Exceed MAX incomplete sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections TCP and UDP exceeded the user configured threshold Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall Note When the number of incomplete connections TCP UDP gt Maximum Incomplete High the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS firewall dynamic sessions until incomplete connections lt Maximum Incomplete Low Access block sent TCP RST The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism via Cl command sys firewall tcprst Table 82 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Attempted access matched a configured filter rule denoted Generic packet filter by its set and rule number and was blocked or forwarded matched set d rule 2d according to the rule Table 83 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy Packet Direction c
210. hen you cannot use Dynamic DNS 12 2 Dynamic DNS Screen To change your NBG334W s DDNS click Network gt DDNS The screen appears as shown NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Figure 78 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name User Name Password Use WAN IP Address Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C Use specified IP Address 0 0 0 wr DynDNS ORG Dynamic DNS Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Enter your user name Password Enter the password assigned to you DL Wildcard Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard ption Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL
211. her words NBG334W User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The NBG334W icon is not an exact representation of your device NBG334W Computer Notebook computer e l Telephone Switch Router gt g N Firewall Server NS SSS umma a ae Nim ee cm I Nn corm 23 a mmm Ga ug BEI Nus mum unum an ill M AY lt gt Modem NBG334W NBG334W User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings O For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e e e e e e e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over the
212. his field blank to delete this static route Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Private This parameter determines if the NBG334W will include this route to a remote node in its RIP broadcasts Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in RIP broadcasts Clear this checkbox to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP broadcasts Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of Address your NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Apply Click Apply
213. his field displays the inside IP address of the server Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule Click the Remove icon to delete a rule 11 4 1 Game List Example Here is an example game list text file The index number service name and associated port s are specified by semi colons no spaces Use the name xxx where xxx is the service name to create a new service Port range can be separated with a hyphen no spaces Multiple non consecutive ports can be separated by commas NBG334W User s Guide 133 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 75 Game List Example version 1 1 name Battlefield 1942 port 14567 22000 23000 23009 27900 28900 2 name Call of Duty port 28960 3 name Civilization IV port 2056 4 name Diablo I and II port 6112 6119 4000 5 name Doom 3 port 27666 6 name F E A R port 27888 7 name Final Fantasy XI port 25 80 110 443 50000 65535 8 name Guild Wars port 6112 80 9 name Half Life port 6003 7002 27005 27010 27011 27015 10 name Jedi Knight III Jedi Academy port 28060 28062 28070 28081 11 name Need for Speed Hot Pursuit 2 port 1230 8511 8512 27900 28900 61200 61230 12 name Neverwinter Nights port 5120 5300 6500 27900 28900 13 name Quake 2 port 27910 14 name Quake 3 port 27660 27960 15 name Rainbow Six 3 Raven Shield port 7777 7787 8777 8787 16 name Serious Sam II port 25600 2
214. ic information about the NBG334W Figure 111 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway B General m ZEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number P 31 Description ZyXEL P 31 Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 Close Cancel NBG334W User s Guide 485 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP NBG334W User s Guide PART V Maintenance and Troubleshooting System 189 Logs 193 Tools 207 Configuration Mode 213 Sys Op Mode 215 Language 219 Troubleshooting 221 System This chapter provides information on the System screens 19 1 System Overview See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens 19 2 System General Screen Click Maintenance gt System The following screen displays Figure 112 Maintenance gt System gt General System Setup System Name Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer 5 minutes 0 means no timeout Password Setup Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Maintenance gt System gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334W in an Ethernet network It is recommended you enter your computer s C
215. igure 10 Summary Wireless Association List 001 001 WLAN Association List Guest WLAN Association List 00 19 cb 04 80 1e 03 52 42 2000 01 01 00 0e 35 96 6d 6a 01 38 47 2000 01 01 Refresh NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Summary Wireless Association List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG334W s LAN or Guest WLAN network Refresh Click Refresh to reload the list NBG334W User s Guide Connection Wizard This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the web configurator 3 1 Wizard Setup The web configurator s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet Refer to your ISP Internet Service Provider checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field Leave a field blank if you don t have that information 1 After you access the NBG334W web configurator click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink You can click the Go to Basic setup or Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly Figure 11 Selec
216. in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses Inthe IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished NBG334W User s Guide 255 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 153 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If
217. ing Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall System Setting Configuration Mode This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on Advanced or not Basic System Operation Mode This shows whether the system is configured to connect to the Internet in Router Mode or Access Point Mode Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG334W port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN port this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN NBG334W User s Guide is disabled Chapter 4 AP Mode Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W 4 3 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG334W features in AP Mode
218. ion 4 Reset your NBG334W to change all settings back to their default This means your current settings are lost See Section 25 4 on page 225 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG334W e forgot the password 1 The default password is 1234 2 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 25 4 on page 225 e cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 Ifyou changed the IP address Section 7 3 on page 102 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I don t know the IP address of my NBG334W 222 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix B on page 235 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG334W If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG334W skip this step Ifthere is a DHCP server on your network make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Section 7 3 on page 102 e fthere is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same subnet as
219. ion authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout The NBG334W automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA WPA2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The NBG334W default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the NBG334W The key must be the same on the ext
220. irewall block all UPnP application packets for example MSN packets NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Table 73 Management gt UPnP gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG334W Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 18 4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP 18 4 0 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 98 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Add Remove Programs Properties 31b xl Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add or remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components GA Address Book Communications 5 5 MB O K Desktop Themes 0 0 MB a v i Games 10 1 MB O Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB xf Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 com
221. l Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz NBG334W User s Guide Appendix H Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel
222. ld only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes Long and Shor
223. le hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 143 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting ui m UR c NN NN A NN C T C ee g D fl i ul I fl 0 B ri i i a a i 2 t 192 168 1 0 24 a m a 3 e You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 144 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 2 Y T i B 1 N a Em HN s b a 3 Internet i a Ww a J a i 1 1 192 168 1 0 25 88519 168 1 128 25 I 43 4 ma mumumumum um PF fee eee xm In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and t
224. le pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 134 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy NBG334W User s Guide 235 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 135 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet gt zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up win
225. less LAN to your existing network make sure you have the following 1 an access point AP or a router with the wireless feature 2 at least one wireless network card adapter which varies according to your computer f you have a desktop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter f you have a laptop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card 3 a RADIUS server only if you want to use IEEE802 1x WPA or WPA2 To have two or more computers communicate with each other wirelessly without an AP or wireless router make sure you have the following 1 two or more wireless network cards adapters which vary according to your computers f you have a desktop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter f you have a laptop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card Setup Information To set up your wireless network using an AP or wireless router make sure your AP or wireless router and wireless network card s adapter s use the same following settings SSID Channel auto or Network type of a wireless network card adapter Infrastructure wireless standard IEEE 802 11b g b g or a Security None WEP 64bit 128bit or 256bit key ASCII or Hex IEEE 802 1x WPA PSK TKIP or AES WPA TKIP or AES WPA2 PSK TKIP or AES WPA2 TKIP or AES NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Preamble typ
226. llowing figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG334W and wireless client the NWD210N in this example NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Figure 47 Example WPS Process PBC Method Wireless Client NBG334W WITHIN 2 MINUTES D SECURITY INFO nummmmmmmmmmmmm 1 COMMUNICATION E 6 2 2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both NBG334W s configuration interface and the client s utilities 1 Launch your wireless client s configuration utility go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station screen on the NBG334W 3 Click Start buttons or button next to the PIN field on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG334W s WPS Station screen within two minutes The NBG334W authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG334W securely The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG334W and wireless client ex NWD210N in this example by using PIN method NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Figure 48 Example WPS Process PIN Method Wireless Cli
227. load a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN Figure 57 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation Internet Connection Advanced ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation User Name Password Retype to Confirm rH Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout sec PPTP Configuration C Get automatically frorn ISP Default Use Fixed IP Address My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Server IP Address Connection ID Name WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Subnet Mask DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server WAN MAC Address Factory default PPTP X pum e ioo in seconds fo 0 0 0 fo 0 0 0 fo 0 0 0 o 0 0
228. locking This means that the NBG334W checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php content filtering only searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw 14 6 2 Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG334W check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php full path URL checking searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw news Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s full path 14 6 3 File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG334W check all of the characters in the URL For example filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s complete filename 152 NBG334W User s Guide PART IV Management Static Route Screens 155 Bandwidth Management 159 Remote Management 169 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 175 Static Route Screens This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG334W 15 1 Static Route Overview Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gatew
229. lowed You can also enter a numerical IP address Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords Denied Access Enter a message to be displayed when a user tries to access a restricted web Message site The default message is Please contact your network administrator Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 5 Schedule Use this screen to set the day s and time you want the NBG334W to use content filtering Click Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule The following screen displays Figure 83 Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule Schedule to Block Day to Block M Everyday TF sun TF Mon Tue wed F thu F ri Sat Time of Day to Block 24 Hour Format all day C From Start fo hour 0 min End hour 0 min Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule
230. ls that the NBG334W uses Table 26 WMM QoS Priorities PRIORITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION voice Typically used for traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter Use this priority WMM VOICE to reduce latency for improved voice quality video Typically used for traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be WMM VIDEO prioritized over other data traffic best effort Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS WMM BEST EFFORT capabilities Use best effort priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency 25 but is affected by long delays such as Internet surfing background This is typically used for non critical traffic such as bulk transfers and print WMM BACKGROUND jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Use background priority for applications that do not have strict latency and throughput requirements 5 5 General Wireless LAN Screen BS If you are configuring the NBG334W from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG334W s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG334W s new settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General
231. m User logout because of user The router logged out a user who ended the session deassociation User logout because of no The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response User timeout expired logout because of idle The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired User request logout because of user A user logged out NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 90 802 1X Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Local User Database does not support authentication method A user tried to use an authentication method that the local user database does not support it only supports EAP MD5 o response from RADIUS Pls check RADIUS Server There is no response message from the RADIUS server please check the RADIUS server Use Local User Database to authenticate user The local user database is operating as the authentication server Use RADIUS to authenticate user The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server o Server to authenticate user There is no authentication server to authenticate a user Local User Database does not find user s credential A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database Table 91 ACL Setting Notes
232. m Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly NBG334W User s Guide Safety Warnings NBG334W User s Guide Safety Warnings NBG334W User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview cits 12 eee c c 29 Geno te Mrpw Your NEG Say Looustaed as RHCO
233. m blocks a UDP packet it drops the packet without sending a response packet Service Setup Enable Services Blocking Select this check box to enable this feature Available Services This is a list of pre defined services ports you may prohibit your LAN computers from using Select the port you want to block using the drop down list and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field Blocked Services This is a list of services ports that will be inaccessible to computers on your LAN once you enable service blocking Custom Port A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre defined Available Services list and you must define using the next two fields Type Choose the IP port TCP or UDP that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Port Number Enter the port number range that defines the service For example if you want to define the Gnutella service then select TCP type and enter a port range from 6345 to 6349 Add Select a service from the Available Services drop down list and then click Add to add a service to the Blocked Services Delete Select a service from the Blocked Services list and then click Delete to remove this service from the list Clear All Click Clear All to empty the Blocked Services Schedule to Block Day to Block Select a check box to configure which days of the week or everyday you want service blocking to be activ
234. m the WAN goes to the NBG334W 4 The NBG334W then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1 Figure 79 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem LAN Subnet 1 WAN Internet Subnet 2 3 A 13 3 General Firewall Screen Click Security gt Firewall to open the General screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG334W s firewall and set up firewall logs Figure 80 Security gt Firewall gt General General Services Firewall Setup M Enable Firewall LAN to WAN No Log x WAN to LAN no Log z LAN to Guest WLAN No Log Guest WLAN to LAN No Log z Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The NBG334W performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply Log Select whether to create a log for packets that are traveling in the selected direction when the packets are blocked Log All or forwarded Log Forward Or select Not Log to not log any records To log packets related to firewall rules make sure that Access Control under Log is selected in the Logs g
235. make all of your changes again You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button To reset the NBG334W 1 Make sure the power LED is on and not blinking 2 Press and hold the RESET button for five to ten seconds Release the RESET button when the power LED begins to blink The default settings have been restored If the NBG334W restarts automatically wait for the NBG334W to finish restarting and log in to the web configurator The password is 1234 If the NBG334W does not restart automatically disconnect and reconnect the NBG334W s power Then follow the directions above again 25 5 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting cannot access the NBG334W or ping any computer from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG334W 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG334W NBG334W User s Guide 225 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the NBG334W 5 Check that both the NBG334W and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG334W 7 Make sure you allow the NB
236. matically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT 18 1 3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the NBG334W allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 18 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP 18 3 UPnP Screen Click the Management gt UPnP to display the UPnP screen Fig
237. mbols ReAuthentication Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in Timer in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The seconds default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout The NBG334W automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK Update Timer WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA WPA2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations ina WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configura
238. merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products NBG334W User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information NBG334W User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66499 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone cal
239. municate with the NBG334W using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Table 71 Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 DNS Screen Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Refer to the chapter on Wizard Setup for background information To change your NBG334W s DNS settings click Management gt Remote MGMT gt DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 96 Management gt Remote MGMT gt DNS DNS Service Port 53 Service Access LAN Secured Client IP Address all C Selected 0 0 0 0 Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Management gt Remote MGMT gt DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may send DNS queries to the NBG334W Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the Address NBG334W Select
240. n STEP 1T STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 fl Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type 3 4 2 PPPoE Connection Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance RADIUS NBG334W User s Guide 53 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334W rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG334W does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE Figure 20 Wizard Step 3
241. n your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the NBG334W Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your NBG334W that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG334W will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without probl
242. nable the static route Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen Click the Remove icon to delete a static route 15 2 1 Static Route Setup Screen To edit a static route click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Fill in the required information for each static route NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route Screens Figure 86 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup Static Route Setup Route Name Active Private IP Subnet Mask Metric Destination IP Address Gateway IP Address 3 E Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Management Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave t
243. nabled You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering You can also subscribe to category based content filtering that allows your NBG334W to check web sites against an external database Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers NBG334W User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions Table 101 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG334W You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the NBG334W assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider IP Multicast IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The NBG334W supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Int
244. name gt The router received an ARL Authority Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 89 PKI Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION d to decode th received ca cert Fail The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field d to decode th ived user cert Fail rec The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field d to decode th received CRL Fail The router received a corrupted CRL Certificate Revocation List from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Fail dtod received ARL code th The router received a corrupted ARL Authority Revocation List from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd data lt size gt too large Max size allowed lt max size gt The router received directory data that was too large the size is listed from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded Cert trusted lt subject name gt The router has verified the path of the ce
245. net 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 111 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 112 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 112 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subn
246. nfiguration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type User Name Password Get automatically from ISP Default Use fixed IP address My IP Address 0 0 0 0 My IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Connection ID Name The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 15 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop down list box To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above PPTP Configuration Get automatically Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address from ISP Use fixed IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG334W a fixed address unique IP address My IP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP My IP Subnet Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given Mask Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field It must follow the c id Name and n name format For example C 12 or N My ISP This field is optional and depends on the
247. nguage Screen Click the language you prefer The web configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG334W Figure 131 Language Language Language Selection English Deutsch Francais Espanol Li ci Nd Italiano NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 24 Language NBG334W User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs NBG334W Access and Login Internet Access Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting Advanced Features 25 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The NBG334W does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 7 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG334W 8 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG334W and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 9 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334W 10 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 7 on page 33 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cabl
248. nne 216 Figure 129 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General Router cssccccceeesscceeeeessneeceeeetteeeeeeennnenes 216 Figure 130 Maintenance gt Sys Op Mode gt General AP eeeesseseeesesseesc eene tht ena btt eomunsiene 217 Foe T TENU eet cies aan oasis paesi Urxeebik iui e et ERR E e Dlra LU pA FED cc PME A LE EU REEL LOREM ubiTR UM RO brc ER RE RUE ERA 219 Figure T32 Wall mouning Example 1i pe E ebU pP CIAR E pP ELDER vb bre rtm erecta tbxqeer clid esi bo pede rid DHARREEMdN 233 Figure 133 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap SOFBW ues diei ti dediet o oen Daci ados paesi s Md dod ERR S p 233 Figure t34 Pap BIBORSE oca dB beet a d a epa hana ena itat iste aa Ep U EpL Mod 235 Figure 135 Internet ODIOIS PEFIMEIG 22iasssesesiscetee epe pa eset etna anxia Spo vFE Spp Y YER bbb EHE O TEE 236 Figure 139 menet Options PEIVEIQ auoeendispecteo oa RpOOHSUARMOASWR RULES ORARE RES A NE 237 Figure T37 Pop up Blocker SeliNgS acaceinncedaciaiaerbeckaieaceccinneneisernsanececedaieeniseeksaesatenntinamtene 237 Figure 138 Internet Options Security vicdrcsiseccdiccsemcddassdeaaiadessaseidedies anian ran E i aia 238 Figure 139 Security Settings Java Seripting iuis eser pnta kh edo n dna E t RR A X 239 Figure 140 Security Settings dua coueasaiesetec scd ttum utile nan teen vesc Erro UA bola Pu ata iau bu asp t nn ERROR 239 gU E iM 5 240 Figure 142 Network Number and Host ID uuu inocente at a e i a anth RR 242 Figur
249. o configure this screen To change your NBG334W s MAC filter settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 40 Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter MAC Address Filter Active Filter Action C Allow Deny set MAC Address set MAC Address 1 o0 00 00 00 00 00 17 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 18 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 o0 00 00 00 00 00 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 S00 0D 7 aq Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the NBG334W MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG334W Select Allow to permit access to the NBG334W MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG334W Set This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to Address the NBG334W in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the pre
250. o distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 6 1 Services and Port Numbers The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the DNS service UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 64 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 24032 A popular videoconferencing solution from Whit
251. o the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 3 Time Setting Screen To change your NBG334W s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the NBG334W s time based on your local time zone Figure 113 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 05 21 14 Current Date 2000 01 01 Time and Date Setup Manual New Time hh mm ss 5 po Y New Date yyyy mm dd 2000 fi rh C Get from Time Server G Auto C User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v Daylight Savings Start Date Irs z E y z of z 2000 01 01 at p o clock End Date f z s urday of p z 2000 01 01 at li o clock Reset 190 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 19 System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG334W Each time you reload this page the NBG334W synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG334W Each time you reload this page the NBG334W synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select
252. ode d ICMP type d ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user s setting For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 Firewall rule NOT Packet Direction type d code d match lt rule d gt ICMP ICMP access matched or didn t match a firewall rule denoted by its number and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule For type and code details see Table 92 on page 204 Triangle route packet forwarded ICMP The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through Packet without a NAT table entry blocked ICMP The router blocked a packet that didn t have a corresponding NAT table entry Unsupported out of order ICMP ICMP The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order ICMP Router reply ICMP packet The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 84 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION board d line d channel d call d s C01 Outgoing Call dev x ch x s The router received the setup requirements for a call call is the reference count number of the call dev is the device type 3 is for dial up 6 is for PPPoE 10 is for PPTP channel or ch is the call channel ID For example board 0 line O channel 0 call 3 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Means t
253. of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services O SB RIP Listener 0 0 MB C MB Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB g Universal Plug and Play 0 2 MB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 18 4 0 2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG334W Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG334W Turn on your computer and the NBG334W Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 103 Network Connections E Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back i d P Search lis Folders i Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection nabled Internet Connection Create anew connection 9 Set up a home or small office network Disable this ne
254. oft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Configuring 1 Inthe Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab f your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 146 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address CPAP Popewies TE Bindings Advanced NeBios DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Specify an IP address Imo recs ue ees xr Subnet Mess IV Detect connection to network media Cancel 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in NBG334W User s Guide 251 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s I
255. omputer name in this field see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer s name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 74 Maintenance gt System gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the Inactivity Timer session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Password Setup Change your NBG334W s password recommended using the fields as shown Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back t
256. online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve lt SCEP CA server url The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s address cannot be resolved Enrollment successful The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Enrollment failed The CMP online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve CMP CA server url The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s IP address cannot be resolved Rcvd ca cert subject name The router received a certification authority certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Rcvd user cert subject name The router received a user certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Rcvd CRL size lt issuer name gt The router received a CRL Certificate Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd ARL lt size gt lt issuer
257. ork gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen appears Figure 42 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS QoS Setup M Enable WMM QoS WMM QoS Policy pplication Priority SS AUS 1 o g wi 2 0 Tij o MMC eee cn WIS or d bey The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM QoS Select this to turn on WMM QoS Wireless MultiMedia Quality of Service The NBG334W assigns priority to packets based on the 802 1q or DSCP information in their headers If a packet has no WMM information in its header it is assigned the default priority WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the NBG334W automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application names services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy This is the number of an individual application entry Name This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM Qos Dest Port
258. ork security barrier protecting your network from attacks and controlling access between your network and the Internet Bandwidth Management YES NO This allows you to allocate network bandwidth to specific applications and or subnets Any IP YES NO This allows a computer to access the NBG334W when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet Wireless YES YES This allows two or more devices to communicate without wires based on IEEE 802 11 wireless standards 32 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334W 1 5 Ways to Manage the NBG334W Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG334W Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG334W using a supported web browser Command Line Interface Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore 1 6 Good Habits for Managing the NBG334W Do the following things regularly to make the NBG334W more secure and to manage the NBG334W more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working
259. ort Search All Programs gt 177 Run P Log OFf o Turn Off Computer untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT Figure 149 Windows XP Control Panel amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q jach X d Search e Folders Gi Address J Control Panel v3 Control Panel G Switch to Category View See Also A indows Update Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties NBG334W User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 150 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back 2 Search ie Folders E SS e Network Connections LANorHigh Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection amp Create anew nabled connection sa a standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte f setup a home or small Disable office network Status Disable this network device Repair W Repair this connection Bridge Connections mij Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 151 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properties Gen
260. ote Management CDR PPP UPnP Forward Web Sites Blocked Web Sites Blocked Java etc Attacks 802 1x Wireless Any IP F1 Fl EJ Fl EI EJ EJ Dl RI SI EJ C1 EJ Cl EJ RI RI T The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION E mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e mail message that the NBG334W sends Not all NBG334W models have this field Send Log To The NBG334W sends logs to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank the NBG334W does not send logs via e mail NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 77 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Alerts To Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail SMTP Authentication SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exch
261. otect your wireless network Note The NBG334W may be prone to RF Radio Frequency interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens wireless phones Bluetooth enabled devices and other wireless LANs Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the NBG334W Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the NBG334W s configuration and put it back on the NBG334W later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Firewall You can configure firewall on the NBG334W for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example Content Filter The NBG334W blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is e
262. ource Port Enter the port number of the source See Table 64 on page 163 for some common services and port numbers Protocol Select the protocol TCP or UDP or select User defined and enter the protocol service type number OK Click OK to save your customized settings Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 16 10 Bandwidth Management Monitor Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Monitor to open the bandwidth management Monitor screen View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use Figure 91 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Monitor Monitor AutoClass H AutoClass M Default Class 0 100000 kbps 0 100000 kbps 0 100000 kbps NBG334W User s Guide Remote Management This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens 17 1 Remote Management Overview BS Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which NBG334W interface if any from which computers When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules You may manage your NBG334W from a remo
263. p ssssssuuse 157 Table 61 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example suus 160 Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities a irsoss eee inao ak beri a gag REF 94a a arr FEDES A qM eS a PE aX FEFE enans 160 Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services sesssssse eene 161 Table 64 Commonly Used Services usasa epe pi pna ek rna d era cea Ra ra E Re dnb e PR Ed Ra a a anne 163 Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes sseeee 164 Table 66 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General sse eene enne 165 Table 67 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced sse eene 166 Table 68 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced User defined Service Rule Configuration 167 Table 69 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW sssssssssssssssssenreere nente nnne nmeretr sensn nene 170 Table 70 Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet sss eren nnn 172 Table 71 Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP sassssrcessesssasssesssssaesseetisonsesterssorassiabssanaesnantaanacasneasienss 172 Table 72 Management gt Remote MGMT gt DNS vaiscccnssssssreciva eant Eo RR Rx ERR FER Eq a eR FR ri tna E ek aa o 173 Table 73 Management gt UPAP gt General 25i reti eo bir aor EXE Ee eed vba v ee XR t 24 A Vs pesa DV E baee PEN naa 176 Table 74 Maintenance gt System gt General 1 eere net rbd d et taba ane a
264. packet 1s dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi Fi network than WEP making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier to use consistent single alphanumeric password User Authentication WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do no
265. ple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems NBG334W User s Guide 279 Appendix F Services Table 118 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar
266. ponents selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply 3 In the Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 99 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components Communications TT To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components i NetMeeting 3 Phone Dialer 0 2 MB CJ Universal Plug and Play 0 4 MB Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB J Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details teca 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figu
267. ps from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Add Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ NBG334W User s Guide 237 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 138 Internet Options Security General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings e Z o e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet A This zone contains all Web sites you Gites haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional er Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply
268. r changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 5 5 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 38 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection innel 01 24 Operating Channel Channel 006 Security Security Mode Jwra2 Psk wPA Compatible Pre Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer fisoo In Seconds Idle Timeout 500 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer reco In Seconds Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Network Wireless LAN General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG334W even when the NBG334W is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and sy
269. r forwarded according to the rule Triangle route packet forwarded The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE through OSPF Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked TCP UDP IGMP ESP Corresponding NAT table entry GRE OSPF message TCP Router sent blocked web site The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested Table 81 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Under SYN flood attack sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Exceed TCP MAX incomplete sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Note Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen Peer TCP state out of order sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order Note The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 81 TCP Reset Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall session time out sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet w
270. r network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service fi 43 Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 107 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 108 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status ro X General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer wt j s Packets Sent 8 Received 5 943 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the NBG334W without finding out the IP address of the NBG334W first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG334W Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 109 Network Connections
271. r network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel NBG334W User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 118 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Sim
272. re 100 Network Connections s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools BESTES Help Operator Assisted Dialing lt z o Back gt 27 f 5 Dial up Preferences Address r3 Network Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 101 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components E 2 Management and Monitoring Tools M Networking Services 0 3 MB O Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB 5 In the Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 102 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box amp shaded box means that only part
273. ress 224 0 0 0 1s not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN The NBG334W supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the NBG334W queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the NBG334W periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the NBG334W LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 7 4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change your NBG334W s Internet access settings Click Network gt WAN The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose 7 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation Figure 55 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access WAN IP Address Assignment G Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Address DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP Third DNS Server From ISP x WAN MAC Address Factory default C Set WAN MAC Address 00 1
274. rmation is not exchanged at the time of writing NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 34 Roaming Example x 3 li EN x e m P d X oO Q 1 H 1 l f i 1 1 1 AP 1 H AP 2 i H 1 z H i 1 i 7 H 4 w amp y i f s N x ot os j Z s S L4 E E NL 4 Wi pana 4 F t Y P a LN n a ag amm mmm m ee a t The steps below describe the roaming process 1 Co Wireless station Y moves from the coverage area of access point AP 1 to that of access point AP 2 Wireless station Y scans and detects the signal of access point AP 2 Wireless station Y sends an association request to access point AP 2 Access point AP 2 acknowledges the presence of wireless station Y and relays this information to access point AP 1 through the wired LAN Access point AP 1 updates the new position of wireless station Y 5 3 1 Requirements for Roaming The following requirements must be met in order for wireless stations to roam between the coverage areas 1 2 3 All the access points must be on the same subnet and configured with the same ESSID If IEEE 802 1x user authentication is enabled and to be done locally on the access point the new access point must have the user profile for the wireless station The adjacent access points should use different radio channels when their coverage areas overlap All access points must use the same port number
275. rol Firewall SEE UR Soo tomm 145 TA D SS SOO saa 146 Chapter 14 Menit 149 14 1 OIA to Coment FURST oiixssccet pat po PR ESO BRL PR RE ES YR E n LES RU 149 14 2 Rosme WEB Pearce 25 eror EHI PR e re mE Ep ba AV M PME 149 14 3 Days and TIMES P iaaii 149 Tee PASE OOBE iia ao a a a E I LT 149 Ty a E E TE E EE E A eee E T 151 14 6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking cccecceceecseeneeeeesenseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeneees 152 14 6 1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking seee 152 14 6 2 Full Fath URL GK ace css essscnesnuee iestesd ver tentebvieecucrd suet ocrariiciswseeluertmeninaieentelveniis 152 145 3 Filo Name URL Checking nsxusuersdatx dex ai o GE HU RR EROR LAGU ROS RR RR ERG 152 Part IV Management iens RE RER FIR AREHDDEEEEREARNMN KEEERRUVMUNMEKEENENN NER nnne 153 Chapter 15 POUL ROUE CPCS IAS MN PDT TR 155 19 1 GUNS TIVE M OT To TOT 155 15 2 IP Statio ROUE cri DR 155 13 27 Sale Route Sep SPEED 3 retinui dose Desc Had ep aed ante ER RR 156 Chapter 16 Bandwidth MAMAGQSIIGIE iis isassacccisstevacdacie isan taavonasatarsasindacontaatgndavipetenanscttpseabecesbeadendpetanedestes 159 16 1 Bandwidth Management Ov rvi W cccccccsiccnscactsnesaiacerioneccacesnnncacecinasmuieacehammnaennnneacaqtnnens 159 NBG334W User s Guide 145 Table of Contents 16 2 Application based Bandwidth Management cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaea 159 16 3 Subnet based
276. rough the NBG334W If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications you can lower this number to ensure no single client is using all of the available NAT sessions Port Triggering Rules This is the rule index number read only Name Type a unique name up to 15 characters for identification purposes All characters are permitted including spaces NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 53 Network gt NAT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The NBG334W forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the NBG334W to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port number
277. rt The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 212 NBG334W User s Guide Configuration Mode Click Maintenance gt Config Mode to open the following screen This screen allows you to hide or display the advanced screens of some features or the advanced features such as MAC filter or static route Basic is selected by default and you cannot see the advanced screens or features If you want to view and configure all screens including the advanced ones select Advanced and click Apply Figure 125 Maintenance gt Config Mode gt General Configuration Mode Basic C Advanced Reset The following table describes the labels in the screen Table 97 Maintenance Config Mode General LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Mode Basic Select Basic mode to enable or disable features and to monitor the status of your device Advanced Select Advanced mode to set advanced settings Apply Click on this to set the mode Reset Click on this to reset your selection to the default Advanced The following table includes the screens that you can view and configure only when you select Advanced NBG334W User s Guide 213 Chapter 22 Configuration Mode BS Table 98 Advanced Configuration Options
278. rtificate with the listed subject name Due to lt reason codes gt cert not trusted lt subject name gt Due to the reasons listed the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate Please see Table 92 on page 204 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes Table 90 802 1X Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION user Local User Database accepts A user was authenticated by the local user database credential error Local User Database reports user A user was not authenticated by the local user database because of an incorrect user password Local User Database does not find user s credential A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database RADIUS accepts user A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server RADIUS rejects user RADIUS Server Pls check A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server Please check the RADIUS Server Local User Database does not support authentication method The local user database only supports the EAP MD5 method A user tried to use another authentication method and was not authenticated User timeout expired logout because of session The router logged out a user whose session expired user authentication response fro
279. s Figure 155 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu E File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser Control Panels i Favorites Key Caps Network Browser G Recent Applications il Recent Documents cif Remote Access Status Scrapbook 49 Sherlock 2 d Speakable Items y Stickies Startup Disk ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound TCP IP e USB Printer Sharing 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 156 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Li TCP IP camest va Setup Configure Using DHCP Server DHCP Client ID l IP Address lt will be supplied by server 7 Subnet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr x will be supplied by server 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following NBG334W User s Guide
280. s End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT NBG334W User s Guide Dynamic DNS 12 1 Dynamic DNS Introduction Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 12 1 1 DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname BS If you have a private WAN IP address t
281. s Behind Port Forwarding Example ceceeeeee 130 The General NAT SCIEN 415p S ra Re kA Fet Ia a RB n td ga a EE C RE QUK enia pde SRM 130 TLANAT Application Sree asrnane aininn anini anea EA ANE EA Aa i a or EAA E UiA ADEE 131 TVA A Game List EIS Em 133 EE duciigeio gd cmt TT 134 11 5 1 Tigger Port Forwarding Example 1 cach GP Fr qa SEE fe eh Er ERE Pep qa n betU eg aab a 134 11 5 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 cerent rna nts 135 T3 5 INDE PATI SOTEER raroa rada ct bad paa ERR REA UG ea badbedacadliaasulaellsiahidasaubabbasseadsiaueleviss 135 Chapter 12 Bigrtpril 139 12 1 Dynamic DNS Inteodi6lDh uusescesucis cosexku tas eor eue p At uE FREE GHHUPE VUE uy TO OUR TURN EE S UR2 E EUEE EXP sa Dar Fas de 139 NBG334W User s Guide Table of Contents TA I PUN M 139 122 By Tel cal sal BL bedi 212 c Rape prey ere M 139 Part lik GUE M c 141 Chapter 13 gioi mre TU 143 121 mroducion tO ZyXEL Frowall e 143 Te GTN Tau 1 MET OE 143 131 2 State Inspection Frewall E T 143 13 1 3 About the NBOGOSSWN Firewall unisce scsicacii seti dotes ltd cic aet dL viaa 143 13 1 4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall seesesss 144 Tte UE 3207 Mame 144 13 2 1 THangle Routes and IP ABS iiauuccccei ise repeat pee tutt paa a euren erue ebd dees sa ppc pe Rub ttes 144 132 Gene
282. s in the URL Schedule Use this screen to set the days and times for the NBG334W to perform content filtering Management Static Route IP Static Use this screen to configure IP static routes Route Bandwidth General Use this screen to enable bandwidth management MGMT Advanced Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule Monitor Use this screen to view the NBG334W s bandwidth usage and allotments Remote WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from MGMT which IP address es users can use HTTP to manage the NBG334W Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the NBG334W FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the NBG334W DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can send DNS queries to the NBG334W UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG334W Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG334W s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to change your NBG334W s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmw
283. s security 74 overview 75 type 75 wireless security 225 Wireless tutorial 63 93 WPS 93 Wizard setup 47 Bandwidth management 60 complete 61 Internet connection 52 system information 48 wireless LAN 49 WLAN Interference 267 Security Parameters 275 WMM 79 WMM priorities 79 World Wide Web 161 WPA compatible 77 WPA WPA2 272 WPS 34 WWW 90 161 X Xbox Live 161 Z ZyNOS 39 65 NBG334W User s Guide Index NBG334W User s Guide
284. ss adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client The screens may vary for different models 1 The NBG334W supports IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g wireless clients Make sure that your notebook or computer s wireless adapter supports one of these standards 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer See your wireless adapter s User s Guide for information on how to do that 3 After you ve installed the utility open it If you cannot see your utility s icon on your screen go to Start gt Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears The utility displays a list of APs within range as shown in the example screen below 4 Select SSID Example3 and click Connect NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial Figure 51 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t Available Network List Site Information Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802119 Me zyxet_yzu 6 62 Channel 6 T ZyXEL_test 6 60 Security PA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 0j E Scan Connect 5 Select WPA PSK and type the security key in the following screen Click Next Figure 52 Security Settings Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK gt Pre Shared Key TrisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next Exit 6 The Confirm Save window appears Check your
285. ssseeeeeer e eene enne 85 Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Fiter iicciesecscer atesaseetea pre tke RR prb Q ERES ST ERE TEE ERRi 86 Table 33 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced 11st ehe er nne ndr roa Fay ri Anann AEN ape dedo in 87 Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS ssssssssssssseenene nennen eniin nnne nener ness n s neni nnne 88 Eu l m T 91 VAIS SS vircs m 92 Table 37 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation ssssesssssse 103 Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation sssssssssse 105 NBG334W User s Guide 25 List of Tables Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation cecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 108 TB du WAN gt CPPS assets ei cci Eo pea ACE aa ER EATA anena Sa EE ERA Fed E M AVES LLL FOLE CUP na Fue 110 Teale 01 Network LIKI plns 114 Tate 42 Network gt LAN IP ANIS oco net ge Bod t Ee ER EE Er ap Ub inane eden cu TIS Table 43 Network LAN Advanced iuis ete rm ETFI e t EHE Pec ek eta EYE ares pEPEL Pe OR ER PUPA MEER DRY EE 116 Table 44 Network gt Guest WLAN gt General septi Et scevaaiebisceciscecisvessqucsss aust oun ELE sigue esee ze 118 Table 45 Network gt Guest WLAN gt MAC Filter isiseecen ccepit ttt rana tonsarenandssuaenciadnencaniuasnonnan via a 1
286. stem management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The NBG334W automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling You can change the timeout period in the System screen 17 2 WWW Screen To change your NBG334W s World Wide Web settings click Management gt Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen Figure 92 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW WWW Server Port 80 Server Access LAN Secured Client IP Address all C Selected 0 0 0 0 Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address NBG334W using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service Choose Selec
287. t Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it Select Long if you have a noisy network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802 11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble However not all wireless adapters support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in noisy networks Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it otherwise the AP uses long preamble BES The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 115 IEEE 802 119 DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5111 CCK Complementary
288. t Log Settings screen Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again 13 4 Services Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Services The screen appears as shown next If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG334W an ICMP response packet 1s automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the NBG334W exists Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG334W when unsupported ports are probed You can also use this screen to enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them Figure 81 Security gt Firewall gt Services ICMP Respond to Ping on Firewall Rule Misc setting M Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services FAUAUTEEATTUTA ERREUR new rule before rule fi rule number Move rule fi to rule fi rule number Vv Bypass Triangle Route Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 512 fan amp WAN amp Guest WLAN z Apply Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the
289. t Mask 114 subnet mask 57 242 subnetting 244 Summary 43 Bandwidth management monitor 43 DHCP table 43 Packet statistics 44 Wireless station status 45 syntax conventions 4 Sys Op Mode 215 selecting 216 System General Setup 189 System Name 189 System name 48 vs computer name System restart 210 I TCP IP configuration 123 Telnet 171 Temperature 229 Time setting 190 trademarks 281 Triangle routes and IP alias 144 see also asymmetrical routes 144 trigger port 134 Trigger port forwarding 134 example 134 process 134 U Universal Plug and Play 175 Application 175 UPnP 175 Forum 176 security issues 175 URL Keyword Blocking 150 Use Authentication 273 NBG334W User s Guide Index user authentication 76 local user database 76 RADIUS server 76 User Name 140 V VoIP 161 VPN 106 W WAN IP address assignment 56 WAN advanced 109 WAN IP address 56 WAN IP address assignment 58 WAN MAC address 101 warranty 283 note 283 Web Configurator how to access 35 Overview 35 Web configurator navigating 37 web configurator 33 Web Proxy 150 WEP Encryption 82 WEP encryption 81 WEP key 81 Wi Fi Multimedia QoS 79 Wildcard 139 Windows Networking 116 Wireless association list 45 wireless channel 225 wireless LAN 225 Wireless LAN wizard 49 Wireless network basic guidelines 73 channel 73 encryption 76 example 73 MAC address filter 75 overview 73 security 74 SSID 73 Wireles
290. t Wizard or Advanced Mode Please select Wizard Basic or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this D if it is the first time you are setting up your router 2 Choose your language from the drop down list box 3 Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard Figure 12 Select a Language Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup ose the language you need Language Q Configuration Wizard 4 Read the on screen information and click Next Figure 13 Welcome to the Connection Wizard Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard The Connection W will walk you through the most common configuration options This wizard has been broken down into three steps each of which may have multiple pages This wizard will take you through the following steps 3 2 Connection Wizard STEP 1 System Information System Information contains administrative and system related information 3 2 1 System Name System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name In Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name n Windows 2000 click Start Settings and Control Panel and then double click Sys
291. t adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the WAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the WAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or None WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Name SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the wireless LAN Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG334W is currently using over the wireless LAN Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard WPS This shows the WPS WiFi Protected Setup Status Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen Guest WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of guest WLAN on your device IP Address This shows the IP address for guest WLAN network IP Subnet Mask This shows the subnet mask for guest WLAN network DHCP This shows the DHCP role Server or None for guest WLAN network
292. t support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 NBG334W User s Guide 273 274 Appendix E Wireless LANs 25 6 2 WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and only allows it to join the network if the password matches 3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 172 WPA 2 PSK Authentication PSK qM 9 i Ni 4 a MAN j B ies SS i d a NW Ai f 25 6 3 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example You need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management s
293. t to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes BES Do not turn off the NBG334W while firmware upload is in progress NBG334W User s Guide 207 Chapter 21 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the NBG334W again Figure 117 Upload Warning Firmware Upload In Process 1 CE Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes To access the device after a successful firmware upload you need to log in again Check your new firmware version in the system status menu The NBG334W automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 118 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 119 Upload Error Message system Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded fil
294. te location via Internet WAN only ALL LAN and WAN LAN only Neither Disable When you choose WAN or LAN amp WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The NBG334W automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 17 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 1 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the NBG334W will disconnect the session immediately 3 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time 4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it 17 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Use the NBG334W s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the NBG334W s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 17 1 3 System Timeout There is a default sy
295. te with a particular access point only if it is within the access point s coverage area In a network environment with multiple access points wireless stations are able to switch from one access point to another as they move between the coverage areas This is known as roaming As the wireless station moves from place to place it is responsible for choosing the most appropriate access point depending on the signal strength network utilization or other factors The roaming feature on the access points allows the access points to relay information about the wireless stations to each other When a wireless station moves from a coverage area to another it scans and uses the channel of a new access point which then informs the other access points on the LAN about the change An example is shown in Figure 34 on page 78 With roaming a wireless LAN mobile user enjoys a continuous connection to the wired network through an access point while moving around the wireless LAN Enable roaming to exchange the latest bridge information of all wireless stations between APs when a wireless station moves between coverage areas Wireless stations can still associate with other APs even if you disable roaming Enabling roaming ensures correct traffic forwarding bridge tables are updated and maximum AP efficiency The AP deletes records of wireless stations that associate with other APs Non ZyXEL APs may not be able to perform this 802 1x authentication info
296. ted to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 3 Telnet You can configure your NBG334W for remote Telnet access as shown next The administrator uses Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the NBG334W Figure 93 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network p i Internet i N zd E S T MM Incoming Traffic oa lean into 17 4 Telnet Screen To change your NBG334W s Telnet settings click Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet The following screen displays Figure 94 Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet Telnet Server Port ps Server Access LAN Bre Secured Client IP Address all C Selected jooo Apply Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service Secured Client A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed
297. tem Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name n Windows XP click Start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the NBG334W System Name NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 3 2 2 Domain Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the NBG334W via DHCP Click Next to configure the NBG334W for Internet access Figure 14 Wizard Step 1 System Information STEP TH STEP 2 STEPI STEP 4 a System Information Enter a name to ou identify your router on the network This information is optional and you may safely is field blank nt automatically by the ISP to the router If you are having ju may need to enter the Domain Name manually in the field ald is normally left blank Domain Name izyxel com lt Beck nee E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Wizard Step 1 System Information LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334W in an Ethernet network Enter a descriptive name This name can b
298. ters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPP over Ethernet v Service Name D optional User Name Password pue Retype to Confirm pe oo Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout sec o in seconds WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address foooo Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Subnet Mask p 000 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP 7 172 23 5 1 Second DNS Server From ISP 172 23 5 2 Third DNS Server From ISP x 0 0 0 0 WAN MAC Address Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address 92 159 1 C Set WAN MAC Address 00 13 49 02 95 88 Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 7 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation The PPP over Ethernet choice is for a dial up connection using PPPoE The NBG334W supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem i e xDSL cable wireless etc connection Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the end user and ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the router
299. that you can specify while you are off line IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP address Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s automatically by the DDNS server It is recommended that you select this option Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a static IP Address address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG334W User s Guide PART III Security Firewall 143 Content Filtering 149 Firewall This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and explains how to get started with the NBG334W s firewall 13 1 Introduction to ZyXEL s Firewall 13 1 1 What is a Firewall Originally the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted Of course firewalls cannot solve every security problem A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of
300. the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 142 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 mt i at i i i M I mmmh i i L L i L I L I i I L I L I L U anm m m m m m m m 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and
301. the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 NBG334W User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued suner wask AUR ARGH SERRE 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possib
302. tion for this screen 5 5 4 WPA WPA2 Figure 39 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA WPA2 Click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Operating Channel Security Security Mode wPA Compatible ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Accounting Server Active IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Channel 006 WPA2 v eo In Seconds 500 In Seconds fisoo In Seconds haz 0 0 0 0 1813 CN Reset NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG334W even when the NBG334W is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 ReAuthentication Timer in seconds Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless stat
303. to communicate with the IP Address NBG334W using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 FTP Screen You can upload and download the NBG334W s firmware and configuration files using FTP please see the chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client To change your NBG334W s FTP settings click Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP The screen appears as shown Figure 95 Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP FIP FTP Server Port Z Server Access LAN hd Secured Client IP Address 6 all C Selected fo 0 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to com
304. to relay roaming information The access points must be connected to the Ethernet and be able to get IP addresses from a DHCP server if using dynamic IP address assignment 5 4 Quality of Service This section discusses the Quality of Service QoS features available on the NBG334W NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN 5 4 1 WMM QoS WMM Wi Fi MultiMedia QoS Quality of Service ensures quality of service in wireless networks It controls WLAN transmission priority on packets to be transmitted over the wireless network WMM Qos prioritizes wireless traffic according to delivery requirements WMM QoS is a part of the IEEE 802 11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi Fi wireless networks On APs without WMM Qos all traffic streams are given the same access priority to the wireless network If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission demand that exceeds the current network capacity then the new traffic stream reduces the throughput of the other traffic streams The NBG334W uses WMM QoS to prioritize traffic streams according to the IEEE 802 1q tag or DSCP information in each packet s header The NBG334W automatically determines the priority to use for an individual traffic stream This prevents reductions in data transmission for applications that are sensitive to latency delay and jitter variations in delay 5 4 1 1 WMM QoS Priorities The following table describes the WMM QoS priority leve
305. to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 5 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Your NBG334W allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 37 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Wireless Setup Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Security Security Mode Passphrase WEP Encryption q Note M Enable Wireless LAN Operating Channel Authentication Method 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission C Key i i eal C Key 2 Y C Key 3 C key4 CT ZyXEL Channel 10 2457MHz Y Channel 006 Static WEP i mm Generate B4 hitWWEP Auto hd hd for each Key 1 4 A
306. twork device mj Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this Disable LANorH Status a Create Shortcut E al Rename Properties 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 104 Internet Connection Properties EJ Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 105 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advances Sethings Services Select He sarnvices unnig an pour netccre that lemel elt can xd Services Gi memea H2 1 EB 1688618 TEETH TEP be mernece 192 1681 85 3858 P77 LIDP msrases 132 1EE 1 81 7281 25037 UDF 9 meneg 192 1681 F810 31 711 TCR Figure 106 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Tes Name or IP address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on you
307. uct specifications appendix Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall NBG334W User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the NBG334W with the connection cables 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG334W with the screws on the wall Hang the NBG334W on the screws Figure 132 Wall mounting Example MH S S iii Hil The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 133 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22 0 1 6 041 0 2 040 2 e 01 e 16 30 0 2 0 30 0x2 0 NBG334W User s Guide 233 Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Instructions NBG334W User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default BS Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disab
308. ue IP address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for instance only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 3 Connection Wizard You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses BS Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 3 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation
309. up configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the NBG334W s current configuration to your computer 21 2 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG334W Table 96 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process BES Do not turn off the NBG334W while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG334W again NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Figure 121 Configuration Restore Successful Restore Configuration successful YP s 4 E s The Device Is Rebooting Now After the device finishes rebooting the login screen display The NBG334W automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 122 Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged
310. ure 97 Management gt UPnP gt General UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL NBG 334W Internet Sharing Gateway Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature F Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall qQ Note For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Management gt UPnP gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the NBG334W s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG334W so that they can communicate through the NBG334W for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP enabled applications to bypass the firewall Clear this check box to have the f
311. user specific services configured using known ports and applications Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen 5 9 WiFi Protected Setup WiFi Protected Setup WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Depending on the devices in your network you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN Personal Identification Number in the devices Then they connect and set up a secure network by themselves See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6 2 on page 93 5 9 1 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable disable WPS view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS tab NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 44 WPS WPS Setup M Enable WPS PIN Number 21346781 Generate WPS Status Status Unconfigured Apply Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen
312. using a site survey tool Security Mode Select this to specify the security level for this wireless network Select Static WEP WPA PSK WPA WPA PSK2 or WPA2 the corresponding settings display below Or select No Security to not apply security setting for this wireless network See Section 5 5 1 on page 81 Section 5 5 2 on page 81 Section 5 5 3 on page 83 Section 5 5 4 on page 84 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 9 2 Guest WLAN MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG334W to give exclusive access Allow or exclude devices from accessing the NBG334W s guest wireless network Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen For comparing the NBG334W s Guest WLAN and wireless LAN see Appendix A on page 229 NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 9 Guest WLAN To change your NBG334W s MAC filter settings for guest wireless network click Network gt Guest WLAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 65 Network gt Guest WLAN gt MAC Filter MAC Filter MAC Address Filter Active Filter Action Allow Deny
313. ust not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter JEEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons LIE DER RIR OEE REIR FEM SR RAS RR gt AERERTHI ZR RSS HH AIS tel A BS ES gt TITAS SE RH etis RETE BONE R RSS BE BE ee REAR a RAR j RI ERISH WASET ERN CARES HPA GAGS TAKER a ede FSR TERR IH BIRREA SASS BCLS BER Re ee FA RN E a ssc L TF fat a it Th a s ai ao o o Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 00
314. vigation panel to configure NBG334W features NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the sub menus Table 5 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG334W s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network Wireless General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG334W Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and the WAN MAC address Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets Advanced Use this screen to enable other advanced properties Guest WLAN
315. vious configuration for this screen 5 7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 5 Wireless LAN Figure 41 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced Roaming Configuration Enable Roaming Port st 7 Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 M Enable Intra BSS Traffic Output Power 100 802 11 Mode 802 1105 z Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Roaming Configuration Enable Select this option if your network environment has multiple APs and you want your Roaming wireless device to be able to access the network as you move between wireless networks Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Request To Threshold Send CTS Clear To Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value then the RTS CTS handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Enter a value between 0 and 2432 Fragmentation Itis the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 Threshold and 2432 Enable Intra A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communi
316. y BW MGMT Monitor BW MGMT Monitor 2 5 4 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG334W s LAN and or Guest WLAN as DHCP server s or disable them When configured as a server the NBG334W provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on that network or else the computer must be manually configured Click the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the NBG334W s DHCP server NBG334W User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 8 Summary DHCP Table LAN DHCP Table a a NUNT TTC 192 168 1 33 TWPC12731 00 19 cb 04 80 1e 2 192 168 1 35 twpci2116 00 02 63 56 16 9d Guest WLAN DHCP Table fe iP address HostName ac address Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Summary DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Host Name This field displays the computer host name MAC Address
317. ystem using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients NBG334W User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 117 Wireless Security Relational Matrix QURE HE ME ENCRYPTIO ENTER METHOD KEY N METHOD MANUAL KEY IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP No Enable WPA PSK TKIP Yes Enable WPA2 AES No Enable WPA2 PSK AES Yes Enable NBG334W User s Guide 275 Appendix E Wireless LANs 276 NBG334W User s Guide Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the s

ZyXEL NBG334W User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents